IP DSLAM Switch
IDL-2402
User's Manual
- 1 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trademarks
The PLANET logo is a trademark of PLANET Technology. This documentation may refer to
numerous hardware and software products by their trade names. In most, if not all cases, these
designations are claimed as trademarks or registered trademarks by their respective companies.
WEEE Warning
To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of
the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment,
end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning
of the crossed-out wheeled bin symbol. Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted
municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately.
Safety
This equipment is designed with the utmost care for the safety of those who install and use it.
However, special attention must be paid to the dangers of electric shock and static electricity
when working with electrical equipment. All guidelines of this and of the computer manufacture
must therefore be allowed at all times to ensure the safe use of the equipment.
Revision
User’s Manual for PLANET IP DSLAM
Model: IDL-2402
Rev: 1.0 (Oct. 2008)
Part No.: EM-IDL2402_v1
- 3 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Table of Contents
2.3 WEB Configuration.......................................................................................... 27
4. WEB Management................................................................................................... 58
4.1 System.............................................................................................................. 62
4.1.1 System Information................................................................................ 62
4.1.5 CLI Setup............................................................................................... 67
4.1.6 Cluster Setup......................................................................................... 68
4.1.11 User Administration.............................................................................. 75
- 4 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.3 Access Control..................................................................................... 100
4.3.4 Forwarding........................................................................................... 127
4.4 ADSL............................................................................................................... 141
4.5 Traffic.............................................................................................................. 165
4.6.2 SNMP Target........................................................................................ 169
4.7 Maintenance................................................................................................... 172
4.7.5 Fault Management............................................................................... 184
5.1.1 bye....................................................................................................... 212
5.1.3 cluster local.......................................................................................... 212
5.1.7 help...................................................................................................... 213
5.1.10 system contact................................................................................... 213
5.2.1 enable.................................................................................................. 215
5.2.5 show version........................................................................................ 215
5.3.1 configure.............................................................................................. 216
5.3.2 ping...................................................................................................... 216
- 5 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.6 show access-list ethertype................................................................... 217
5.3.9 show access-list l4dstport.................................................................... 218
5.3.10 show access-list mcfldrate................................................................. 218
5.3.13 show account..................................................................................... 219
5.3.17 show alarm history............................................................................. 219
5.3.18 show atmdesc.................................................................................... 220
5.3.19 show atm-loopback............................................................................ 220
5.3.21 show cluster....................................................................................... 220
5.3.24 show dot1x profile.............................................................................. 221
5.3.26 show dot1x server <index>................................................................ 221
5.3.37 show igmp-acl bind xdsl..................................................................... 224
- 6 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.64 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} vc.................................................... 233
5.3.73 show management all........................................................................ 235
5.3.74 show management gbe...................................................................... 235
5.3.75 show pm <port> adsl day................................................................... 235
5.3.76 show pm <port> adsl interval............................................................. 236
5.3.87 show priority-queue config................................................................. 239
5.3.92 show profile service adsl.................................................................... 240
- 7 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.112 show time......................................................................................... 244
5.3.113 show uptime..................................................................................... 244
5.3.121 telnet................................................................................................ 245
5.4 Configure Mode Commands......................................................................... 246
5.4.1 access-list............................................................................................ 246
5.4.5 aging.................................................................................................... 248
5.4.16 cluster-cfg voting-key......................................................................... 251
5.4.17 dot1x.................................................................................................. 251
5.4.21 dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 circuit ................................................. 251
- 8 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.27 dsl-line-identify pppoe srv-name ........................................................ 253
5.4.30 fdbstatic <number> disable................................................................ 254
5.4.35 firmware upgrade............................................................................... 255
5.4.52 management gbe............................................................................... 259
5.4.55 pm clear............................................................................................. 260
5.4.65 priority-queue atm scheduling............................................................ 262
5.4.71 profile tca xdsl.................................................................................... 264
- 9 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.79 rmon alarm <index> owner ................................................................ 267
5.4.84 rmon alarm <index> variable ............................................................. 268
5.4.88 rmon event <index> owner ................................................................ 271
5.4 92 rmon history <index> ifc..................................................................... 272
5.4.93 rmon history <index> interval............................................................. 272
5.4.94 rmon history <index> owner............................................................... 273
5.4.99 route default....................................................................................... 275
5.4.100 route delete...................................................................................... 275
5.4.104 runningcfg write partition.................................................................. 276
5.4.109 snmp target <name> tag-list ............................................................ 278
5.4.113 syslog server.................................................................................... 279
5.4.118 tcm red............................................................................................. 280
5.4.120 temperature threshold...................................................................... 281
- 10 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 Ethernet Interface Mode Commands............................................................ 288
5.5.2 gbe admin............................................................................................ 288
5.5.3 gbe speed............................................................................................ 288
5.6 Interface Mode Commands........................................................................... 289
5.6.3 ipoa...................................................................................................... 289
5.7.1 accfrm.................................................................................................. 290
5.7.5 auth enable.......................................................................................... 290
5.7.6 auth-sever-timeout............................................................................... 291
5.7.7 auth-supp-timeout................................................................................ 291
5.7.10 default prio......................................................................................... 292
5.7.12 egress................................................................................................ 293
5.7.13 force priority....................................................................................... 293
5.7.23 max-mac............................................................................................ 295
5.7.25 port-control force-authorized.............................................................. 296
5.7.26 port-control force-unauthorized.......................................................... 296
- 11 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.32 pvc atmdesc shp................................................................................ 298
5.7.34 quiet-period........................................................................................ 298
5.7.35 reauthentication disable..................................................................... 299
5.7.39 stack tls port enable........................................................................... 299
5.7.41 vlan <VLAN ID> disable..................................................................... 300
5.7.44 vlan list............................................................................................... 301
5.8 GBE Bridge Mode Commands...................................................................... 302
5.8.1 accfrm.................................................................................................. 302
5.8.3 default prio........................................................................................... 302
5.8.4 egress.................................................................................................. 302
5.8.8 max-mac.............................................................................................. 303
5.8.12 vlan <VLAN ID> disable..................................................................... 304
5.8.15 vlan list............................................................................................... 305
5.9.1 accfrm.................................................................................................. 306
5.9.3 default prio........................................................................................... 306
5.9.4 egress.................................................................................................. 306
5.9.8 max-mac.............................................................................................. 307
5.9.12 vlan <VLAN ID> disable..................................................................... 308
5.9.15 vlan list............................................................................................... 309
- 12 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.10.5 line port...............................................................................................311
5.11 IPoA Configure Mode Commands .............................................................. 312
5.11.2 brasmac list........................................................................................ 312
5.11.8 pvc atmdesc....................................................................................... 314
5.12.1 bcrate cir............................................................................................ 316
5.12.4 dstmac list.......................................................................................... 317
5.12.6 dstip list.............................................................................................. 318
5.12.7 ethertype............................................................................................ 318
5.12.12 ipprotocol list.................................................................................... 322
5.12.13 l4dstport........................................................................................... 322
5.12.18 srcip list............................................................................................ 324
5.12.20 srcmac list........................................................................................ 325
5.13.5 unshp................................................................................................. 328
- 13 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.13.10 cbr-shp............................................................................................. 331
5.14 Priority List Mode Commands.................................................................... 334
5.14.1 ds....................................................................................................... 334
5.14.4 dstip list.............................................................................................. 336
5.14.6 dstmac list.......................................................................................... 338
5.14.7 ethertype............................................................................................ 338
5.14.10 ipprotocol list.................................................................................... 340
5.14.12 srcip list............................................................................................ 341
5.14.14 srcmac list........................................................................................ 342
5.14.15 tos.................................................................................................... 343
5.15.3 alarm major........................................................................................ 346
5.15.4 alarm minor........................................................................................ 347
5.17 Rate Limit Profile Mode Commands........................................................... 349
5.17.1 share-slb............................................................................................ 349
5.17.2 share-dlb............................................................................................ 349
5.17.3 non-share-slb..................................................................................... 350
5.18.7 ra-interval........................................................................................... 354
- 14 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.19.4 carriermask........................................................................................ 356
5.19.6 modem features................................................................................. 357
5.19.8 opmode.............................................................................................. 357
5.19.9 pbomode............................................................................................ 358
5.20.2 adsl-tca disable.................................................................................. 362
5.21 Dot1x Mode Commands.............................................................................. 363
5.21.5 server <number> max-fail.................................................................. 365
Appendix A ADSL Operational Mask Table............................................................. 368
Appendix B Alarm Table........................................................................................... 369
Appendix C Cleaning the AIR Filter......................................................................... 370
- 15 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1. Introduction
Planet IDL-2402 is a 24-port ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ mini IP DSLAM, which has one
1000Base-T uplink Interface, for efficient scalability and easy deployment in the
network with small ADSL environment. With built-in POTS splitter subscriber ports, the
PLANET IDL-2402 is a Cost-Effective Solution for Network Service Provider to offer
excellent services to multiple subscribers.
The PLANET IDL-2402 supports local and remote managed capabilities of CLI, SNMP,
Telnet via RS-232 Console Port and Web GUI management interface. Via the
user-friendly Web GUI, the PLANET IDL-2402 can be managed by workstations running
standard web browsers that provide the easy-to-use operation and convenient
maintenance.
Furthermore, the PLANET IDL-2402 provides many features such as QoS, VLAN,
Multicast, Bandwidth Management, Traffic Prioritization, and Access Control List. With
the advanced QoS features, IDL-2402 is an ideal solution for next generation broadband
network to deliver rich video contents, DSL, POTS, and VoIP service over ADSL2+
connection.
1.1 Product Features
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
‹
24-Port ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ subscriber interface with build-in POTS splitter
DMT data rate: Downstream up to 25 Mbps / Upstream up to 3Mbps
1000Base-T uplink interface
Web GUI based management
Local RS-232 CLI and Ethernet SNMP / Telnet / SSH management
Firmware upgradeable via FTP
Configuration backup and restoration via TFTP
Supports IPSec / L2TP / PPTP VPN pass-through
Supports 4K MAC address
Supports IEEE 802.1q Tag-based VLAN and Protocol-based VLAN
Layer 2 / 3 filtering based on MAC, IP, Protocol, Port number and Ether Type
Access Control List by MAC / IP / Protocol / Port number
Traffic prioritization (802.1p)
Supports IGMP snooping / proxy per IGMP v1, v2, and v3
FAN alarm indicating
Temperature monitoring and system overheating trap functionality
- 16 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.3 Application
The PLANET IDL-2402 offers the benefit of high performance to central office co-location
and MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) / MDU (Multi-Dwelling Unit) markets. It provides broadband
data service over existing copper wires without affecting the conventional voice service
by 24 subscriber ports with built-in POTS splitter. A PLANET IP DSLAM is the perfect
solution for NSP a cost-effective but high-value centrally management capability.
Application 1: For Community
Application 2: For Building
- 18 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.4 Outlook
1.4.1 Front Panel
The front panels of IDL-2402 are shown below.
IDL-2402
LED Definition
LED
Color
Green
Red
LED Description
Normal Operation
Self-test fail
SYS
Green
Normal Operation
ALM
Red
To indicate the system alarm status
ADSL Port is activated and linked
ADSL Port is Disabled
On
Off
DSL status
Green
Flash
ADSL Port is activated but not linked
On
Off
Uplink Port connect with 100/1000Mbps Ethernet link
Uplink Port connect with 10Mbps Ethernet link
Orange
Green
Uplink
On
Active
Off
Inactive
Flash
Uplink Port Transmit / receive data
Port Definition
Port
Port Description
AC PWR
AC Power cord plug-in, 100 - 240VAC is allowed.
Gigabit Ethernet port.
Uplink Port
10/100/1000Mbps, auto-negotiaiton, auto-MDI
RS-232 port for system configuration and maintenance.
Default settings: 9600, 8, N, 1
Console Port
PHONE
LINE
RJ-21 connector for connecting POTS lines.
RJ-21 connector for connecting DSL lines.
- 19 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.5 Technical Specifications
Product
Model
IP DSLAM
IDL-2402
Hardware Specification
Case
1.5U high box-type with a rack-mountable enclosure
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)
Console RS-232 Serial Port (9600, 8, N, 1)
Uplink
Ports
LINE
1 x RJ-21 Connector
PHONE
1 x RJ-21 Connector
1 x SYS LED
1 x ALM LED
1 x Uplink LED
24 x ADSL LEDs
LED Indicators
Software Specification
Compliant with ADSL standard
− ANSI T1.413 issue 2
− G.dmt (ITU G.992.1)
− G.lite (ITU G.992.2)
Standard
− G.hs (ITU G.994.1)
Capable of ADSL2 standard
− G.dmt.bis (ITU G.992.3)
Capable of ADSL2+ standard
− G.dmt.bisplus (ITU G.992.5)
− Subscriber interface with built-in POTS splitter
− Downstream DMT data rate up to 25 Mbps
− Upstream DMT data rate up to 3 Mbps (Annex M)
− Distance up to 18 kft
− 8 PVCs per xDSL port
− DHCP forward
System
− DHCP relay agent
− PPPoE relay
− IPSec/L2TP/PPTP VPN pass-through function
− PPPoA to PPPoE inter-working
− Supports IPv4 packet
− Supports IEEE802.1d Ethernet bridge function between trunk Ether port
and ATM VCs
Bridge Function − Supports static source MAC table provisioning, automatic source MAC
learning and block duplicate ones
− Supports 4K static MAC address table
− 128 MAC address per x DSL port
− IEEE 802.1q Port-based / Protocol-based VLAN
− 512 non-stacked VLAN-ID simultaneously ranging from 1 to 4095
− VLAN stacking and VLAN cross-connect
VLAN Function − IP Spoofing prevention
− MAC anti-Spoofing
− Port isolation functionality
− Static VLAN group and membership provisioning
Multicast
− IP multicast forwarding
- 20 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Function
Security
− Complies with RFC2684 bridged payload encapsulation mode
− Up to 256 multicast groups and 512 copies simultaneously
− Up to 48 profile-based Multicast Access Control
− Limit maximum number of IGMP groups joined per bridge port
− IGMP snooping / proxy per IGMP v1, v2, and v3
− IGMP proxy and IGMP snooping Selection
− Supports Layer-2 frame filtering based on MAC and Ether Type
− Supports Layer-3 filtering based on IP, Protocol, and Port number
− IEEE 802.1X authentication
− Control the bandwidth occupied by broadcast, multicast, and unknown
unicast (flooding)
− Rate-limit profile binding per bridge port
− Three Color Marking (TCM) policer
− Ethernet rate limit per bridge port
− ToS (type of service) / DiffServ (differentiated services) stripping and priority
queuing
QoS
− DSCP mapping to 802.1p
− Selectable adopted priority queue mechanisms according to Strict Priority
Queue (SPQ) and Weighted Fair Queue (WFQ)
− Configurable mapping function between ATM PVC and 802.1p priority
queue
− Supports IP CoS technology
− Web based GUI management
− Local RS-232 CLI, and Ethernet SNMP / Telnet / SSH management
− Remote in-band SNMP / Telnet / SSH management
− Firmware upgradeable via FTP
Management
‹
SNMP v1, v2c
- 21 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. Installation
The followings are instructions for setting up the IDL-2402. Refer to the illustration and
follow the simple steps below to quickly install your IP DSLAM.
2.1 Safety Instruction
The following is the safety instructions for IP DSLAM before installing.
>> The maximum operating temperature of the IP DSLAM is 65ºC. Care must be taken
to allow sufficient air circulation or space between units when the IP DSLAM is
installed inside a closed rack assembly and racks should safely support the
combined weight of all IP DSLAM.
>> The connections and equipment that supply power to the IP DSLAM should be
capable of operating safely with the maximum power requirements of the IP DSLAM.
In the event of a power overload, the supply circuits and supply wiring should not
become hazardous.
>> The AC power cord must plug into the right supply voltage. Make sure that the
supplied AC voltage is correct and stable. If the input AC voltage is over 10% lower
than the standard may cause the IP DSLAM to malfunction.
>> Generally, when installed after the final configuration, the product must comply with
the applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which
it is installed. If necessary, consult for technical support.
>> A rare condition can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or
more buildings. If products installed in separate building are interconnected, the
voltage potential can cause a hazardous condition. Consult a qualified electrical
consultant to determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary,
implement corrective action before interconnecting the products. If the equipment is
to be used with telecommunications circuit, take the following precautions:
„ Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.
„
Never install telephone jacks in wet location unless the jack is specially -
designed for wet location.
„ Never touch un-insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line
has been disconnected at the network interface.
„ Caution when installing or modifying telephone lines (other than a cordless
telephone) during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock
from lightning.
„ Do not use a telephone or other equipment connected to telephone lines to report
a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.
- 22 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.2 Hardware Installation
The PLANET IDL-2402 is a 1.5U high box-type IP DSLAM with rack-mountable enclosure.
It can be installed in a standard 19-inch rack by using the mounting brackets provided.
Mount the shelf on the rack using the large screws provided. The procedure to connect
and wire the system is as follows.
2.2.1 System Requirements
z Workstation with Windows NT/2000/XP
z RJ-45 cables
z RJ-11 cables
z Telco-50 cables
z RS-232 console cable
z <Optional> MDF Patch Panel (Model No.: IDL-PAN-48).
2.2.2 Installation Procedure
Step 1: Ground the IP DSLAM by connecting a grounded wire (Optional).
Ground Connections
This section provides the grounding rule for the IDL-2402. All remote system sites must
be properly grounded for optimum system performance.
„
In Central Office:
There should be a CO GND that is adequately grounded. If the measured resistance from
the grounding screw (on the rear panel of the DSLAM, refer to below figure) to CO GND
is less than 5 Ohm, then it can be assumed that the system is well grounded. If the
measured resistance is larger than 5 Ohm, it is recommended to connect the grounding
screw to CO GND using #14 or #12 AWG wire gauge conductor.
„
In Remote Cabinet:
The IDL-2402 should be grounded by connecting a #14 or #12 AWG conductor between
the grounding screw (on the rear panel of the DSLAM, refer to below figure) and the earth
ground or main grounding bar. The resistance between the chassis and the grounding
bar should be less than 25 Ohm.
Rear Panel Connection
IDL-2402 grounding screw on the rear panel
- 23 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 2: Connecting the ADSL LINE and PHONE interfaces
The IDL-2402 supports 24 ports ADSL subscribers per box. There are two RJ21 50-pin
female connectors on the front panel of the system. One for ADSL line and one for POTS
interface.
To connect the subscriber lines, use cables with the RJ21 50-pin male connectors. When
installing, just plug the end of a cable with connector into the LINE and PHONE interface
female connector on the front panel. The other end of the cable is generally tied to the
MDF (Main Distribution Frame).
The pin assignment of LINE/PHONE interface is illustrated below (the numbers in the
connector figures below represent PIN numbers):
For port 1~24:
25
50
1
26
PIN Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
~
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
X
Port
Tip
1
Tip
2
Tip
3
Tip
4
Tip
5
Tip
6
Tip
7
Tip
8
~
~
Tip
18
Tip
19
Tip
20
Tip
21
Tip
22
Tip
23
Tip
24
Number
PIN Number 26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
~
~
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
X
Port
Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring
Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring Ring
18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Note:
The MDF Patch panel is optional of standard package.
Note:
Please plug-in the RJ-21 cable with connector Tenon as below figure.
- 24 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Front Panel Connection
Front panel connection of IDL-2402
UPLINK Port:
Connect to Internet by RJ-45 cable.
Console Port:
Connect to PC by RS-232 console cable in order to administer your IP DSLAM through
CLI.The Console interface on the front panel is the main control interface of the IDL-2402.
The RJ45 connector pin assignment is illustrated below:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
3
4
6
Other pins
TX
RX
GND
unused
Console Port RJ-45 pin assignment
- 25 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To connect the host PC to the console port, a RJ45 (male) connector-to-RS232 DB9
(female) connector cable is required. The RJ45 connector of the cable is connected to
the Console port of the DSLAM; the DB9 connector of the cable is connected to the PC
COM port. The pin assignment of the console cable is shown below:
DB-9F
RJ-45M Pin
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pin 2 RD
Pin 3 TD
Pin 5 DGND
Pin Assignment of Console Cable
Step 3: Hook power cord and apply the power.
- 26 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3 WEB Configuration
This section describes how to use Web Configuration Tool to maintain your IP DSLAM.
The IDL-2402 contains a HTTP server. You can login and configure it by using your Web
Browser.
2.3.1 System Prepartion
Before attempting to configure the IDL-2402, please ensure as below:
Set your computer’s IP with the same network mask of the router. (For example:
Router’s default IP is 192.168.1.1 / 255.255.255.0)
Then you can set computer’s IP to:
192.168.1.x / 255.255.255.0. (The range for x is from 2 to 253)
2.3.2 WEB Configuration Procedure
Step 1: Using your WEB Browser
Open web browser and type http://192.168.1.1 in the browser's address box. This IP is
the default IP address of IDL-2402. Press Enter.
- 27 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 2 : Login the IDL-2402
A login page will appear. Please type your username / password and click “Sign in”. (The
default username / password is admin / admin)
After you login the IDL-2402, you will see the system information as below.
- 28 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 3 : Configure the DSL PVC
Go to “Bridge Æ Interface Setup Æ ADSL PVC” setting screen, select the ADSL port
and click “Create” to apply the PVC settings.
For example, create PVC-1 to Port 1. The default VPI / VCI is 0 / 35.
- 29 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 4 : Enable the ADSL Port Service
Go to “System Æ ADSL Port Service” setting screen, select the ADSL port and Admin
is “ON”. Click “Modify” to make this Port is ON.
You can see the Admin status became to ON.
- 30 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Step 5 : Connect the ADSL2/2+ CPE to Patch Panel
Connect the ADSL2/2+ CPE to Patch Panel and configure it, the VPI / VCI value must be
the same with IDL-2402.
After finish setting, the CPE will establish the ADSL connection with IDL-2402. You can
check the connection status as below figure. The Current Status is ON.
Now the clients can access to Internet through IDL-2402.
Step 6 : Save the running configuration to Flash
Remember to save your running configuration to the flash, or the settings will be lost if
you power-off IDL-2402.
Go to “Maintenance Æ Database” setting screen, select the “(D) Save Running
Config to Flash (System Config) “. There are two partitions on flash, select your
Partition which you want to save and click “Write Running”. The configuration will save
to the Flash.
Note:
Default Partition is Partition1.
- 31 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3.3 How to backup / Restore the Configuration
Configuration Import / Export
The IDL-2402 provides the configuration preservation feature that the configuration
database is stored in flash memory (two partitions available). In addition to the
configuration preservation feature, the IDL-2402 also provides the configuration
export/import feature.
DB Configuration Concept
For CLI:
Suppose that TFTP Server IP address is 172.16.100.181 and configuration file name is
‘testcfg’:
(A) Import file from TFTP Server to the Download Config and then write Download Config
to the Flash (partition 1 or partition 2).
Ex:
enable
configure
remotecfg login 172.16.100.181 get testcfg write partition <number>
- 32 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Import file from TFTP Server to the Download Config and then load Download Config
to the Running Config.
Ex:
enable
configure
remotecfg login 172.16.100.181 get testcfg load
(C) Export: export file from Running config to the TFTP server.
Ex:
enable
configure
runningcfg login 172.16.100.181 put testcfg
(D) Save Running config to the Flash (partition 1 or partition 2).
Ex:
enable
configure
runningcfg write partition <number>
(E) Reload Flash data to the Running config
Ex:
enable
configure
runningcfg load partition <number>
(F) Set system configuration (current boot point) to factory default value
Ex:
enable
configure
restore-factory
(G) Select Configuration Flash Boot Point
Ex:
enable
configure
runningcfg active partition <number>
- 33 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Web:
On the menu tree, click on Maintenance --- > Database. The Database Configuration
page is displayed. Select the database configuration action you want to perform.
(A) Import File (Write Download Config To Flash):
Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download. Then
click on Get File button.
Write downloaded Config to Flash in progress:
- 34 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Write to memory successfully:
Fail to Get File:
- 35 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) Import File (Load Remote Config to Running Config)
Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download. Then
click on Get File button.
Load to Running Config successfully:
Fail to Get File:
- 36 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C) Export File (Put Running Config to Remote TFTP Server)
Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to export. Then
click on Put File button.
TFTP put file successfully:
TFTP put file fail:
- 37 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D) Save Running Config to Flash (System Config)
Click on the drop-down list and select partition, and then click on Write_Running button
to write running configuration to Flash.
Write running config to Flash successfully:
- 38 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(E) Reload Flash to Running Config
Click on the drop-down list and select partition, and then click on LOAD_FLASH button
to load configuration from Flash to Running Config.
Load configuration from Flash to Running Config successfully:
- 39 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F) Restore Factory Default
Click on Factory_Default button to restore factory default configuration.
After loading default configuration to Flash successfully, you must click on RESTART
button to restart the system so that the configuration can take effect.
- 40 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Flash Boot Point Configuration Select
Click on the Boot Config drop-down list and select the partition (Partition1 or Partition2)
as the boot point. Click on Apply button and then restart the system. The system will
restart and load the configuration in the partition you select into the running configuration.
- 41 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.3.4 Firmware Update
For CLI:
If you want to update firmware code, you must get image file from FTP Server.
Suppose that FTP Server IP address is 172.16.10.219 and the image filename is
‘vmlinux_u2402_ 1.00B05’.
Example:
1. Firmware update:
enable
//go to enable mode
configure
//go to configuration mode
firmware login 172.16.10.219 username share password tg123
firmware upgrade vmlinux_u2402_1.00B05
(Firmware upgrade may take a few minutes, don’t turn off or reset the system
during the process. You can get status using command ‘show firmware status’ in
Enable execution mode.)
exit
//back to enable mode
show firmware status
(When status returns “Upgraded already!”, you can restart the system to run
new firmware image. Once you upgrade successfully, you can’t upgrade the
second time unless you have restarted the system.)
show firmware partition
//show partition information
Current Version:1.00B05
Partition
Version
Date
Status
-------------------------------------------
1
2
1.00B05
1.00B05
2007/07/05
2007/07/10
--
Active
(Note: the ‘Active’ status of the firmware partition information means the active
partition for next time restart, not current running partition. You can see which
partition is current running partition by referring to the Current Version. )
2. The IDL-2402 provides two firmware memory partitions. If you want to change the
firmware partition for booting, use the following commands (if you change to the
non-active partition, system will restart immediately):
enable
//go to enable mode
configure
//go to configuration mode
firmware partition <number>
//select partition 1 or 2 for next power-on
- 42 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For Web:
On the menu tree, click on Maintenance --- > Firmware Update. The Firmware Update
page is displayed. Once you have entered all the necessary values, click on Firmware
Update button to start updating the firmware.
Label
Description
Once you have typed in the parameter values, click on this
button to start firmware update.
Firmware Update
Remote FTP Server IP Type in the IP address of the FTP server.
Server User Name
Server Password
File Name
Type in the ftp user name.
Type in the ftp password.
Type in the firmware filename.
Firmware Update
Status
This field shows current status of firmware update process.
Select firmware memory partition (Partition 1 or 2). If you
change to the other partition (not current partition), the system
will restart immediately.
Firmware Partition
Select
- 43 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This section displays the partition information including
firmware version, updating date, and status (active or
not). Note that active partition means the partition for
next power-up, not current partition in use. You can refer
to Current Version to know which partition is the current
partition in use. When you update the firmware, new
firmware will be written to the partition that is not
currently in use.
Partition Information
FTP Get in progress:
The following message is displayed during getting file from FTP server.
Firmware Write in progress:
The Flash Write process may take a few minutes; you must not turn off or reset the
system during the process.
Firmware Write successfully:
When the Flash Write process has completed successfully, the Firmware Update Status
shows “Firmware has upgraded already”. You can now restart the system.
- 44 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Software Introduction
3.1 General Overview
The software architecture of the IDL-2402 is shown in the figure below. It can be divided
into three layers: the management layer, the OAM&P layer, and the firmware layer.
Figure 3-1
Management Software Model
As in the figure, CLI shell, SNMP agent, and WEB server are in the top-most layer
(management layer) of the system software and offering OAM&P function of the DSLAM
based on the conceptual management features as follows:
„
„
„
Configuration Management
Performance Management
Fault Management
The IDL-2402 uses flash memory as the database (DB) to store system configuration
parameters. The firmware layer includes ADSL drivers, Memory and I/O control, etc.
- 45 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.1.1 Features of Management Interface
„
Support CLI, SNMP (v1, v2c), and web-based GUI management interface
through in-band channels
„
„
Support up to 10 CLI sessions at the same time
The in-band management connection of the system is the highest priority of all
supported in-band traffic categories
„
„
Support Telnet interface for remote operators to login system operating console
Support up to 32 configurable SNMP trap destinations and allow the SNMP traps
to be sent to any specified SNMP aware device, for instance, Network
management center
- 46 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2 Configuration Management
The configuration management contains the following aspects:
1. System Setup, such as setup for management IP address/net mask, GBE
interface (including to enable/disable and query the administrative/operational
status of the trunk port), line port (including to enable/disable/reset ADSL port,
query the administrative/operational status of the port, and bind profiles on a per
port basis), CLI session and timeout, Cluster, SNTP, IP routes, and user
administration (including login authorization and provides three security levels).
description)
3. ADSL Configuration (see “
- 47 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. 3.2.2 ADSL Configuration” below for more description)
5. ATM traffic management
6. SNMP setup
The configuration management provides detecting and reporting to the operators through
SNMP Trap for all memory updates reflecting changes in the system configuration. It also
provides logging the changes in the operational state and making this information
available (on-demand) to the operators over the operation interface.
The system contains a database (DB) to store all the provisioning data so that the
configuration can be restored in re-booting. Authorized operators can query the DB to
obtain configuration data.
3.2.1 Bridge Configuration
The bridge configuration of the IDL-2402 includes the following aspects:
„
„
Interface setup
VLAN configuration: static VLAN, protocol based VLAN, VLAN translation, and
IP/MAC anti-spoofing.
„
Access Control: Filtering, VLAN priority remark, rate limit, and priority queue
mapping.
„
„
„
„
Forwarding database
DSL Line Identify
IGMP configuration
IPoA configuration
- 48 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.2.2 ADSL Configuration
Configuration for an ADSLx user port is provisioned by the parameter set, which is a
group of attributes that determine the user port behaviors; and we call it as a profile. The
IDL-2402 provides a profile-based provisioning per the definition of ITUT G997.1 and
RFC 2662 for ADSL line configuration data and a mechanism to associate the ADSL port
to these profiles. One or more ADSL lines may be configured to share parameters of a
single profile.
The ADSL profiles of IDL-2402 include:
„
Service Profile
The parameters include Rate adaptive mode selection, Min/max/planned bit rate,
Interleaving Max delay, and Minimum impulse noise protection.
„
Spectrum Profile
The parameters include the Power management setting, Min/max/target noise margin,
allowed ADSL modes of operation, Carrier mask, RFI band data, Maximum nominal
aggregate transmit power, Maximum PSD level, PSD shape (for ADSL2+), Power
back off initiation, and Maximum aggregate receive power.
„
TCA Profile
The parameters include ESs, SESs, UASs for interval and day PM, and LOS, LOF,
LOPWR, LOL, Error Frame for interval PM only.
The system provides up to 120 Service profiles and Spectrum profiles respectively,
and provides up to 16 TCA profiles. One of the profiles is a fix default that cannot be
modified; users are allowed to create, and edit the other profiles. Each profile contains
a parameter set for downstream and upstream direction respectively. Users can also
observe the actual values of these parameters through CLI, Web-GUI, or EMS.
The ADSL configuration also includes the function for user to query the line status, the
physical layer status, and the channel interface status for ATU-C and ATU-R. The status
information includes the attenuation rate, actual net data rate, the line attenuation, SNR
margin, transmission power, actual interleaving delay, channel characteristics per
subcarrier, quiet line noise PSD, …etc.
- 49 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3 Performance management
Performance management supports performance monitoring by collecting and
thresholding performance parameter counters against 15-miniute intervals for each
interface and module respectively. Users can query the data of these parameters through
CLI and Web-GUI.
Performance statistics include the following:
1. Statistics for current interval:
A real-time aspect contains the reflection of the current value situation before the
new interval. The current value includes values of current 15-min interval and
current 1-day interval.
2. Statistics history at 15-minute basis:
The system stores previous 96 statistics of PM parameters at 15-min interval for
retrieving.
3. Statistics history at 1-day basis:
The system stores previous 1 statistics of PM parameters at 1-day interval for
retrieving.
Most of the performance parameter thresholds are user-programmable. The IDL-2402
uses a threshold crossing alert (TCA) to notify the management system when one of the
counts during a measurement interval exceeds its threshold.
The TCA contains the following information:
– Specific interface involved
– Error condition identifying the measurement type
– Value of the parameter
– Occurrence date and time of the event
The performance management also provides the traffic counter including transmitted
packets, error packets and discarded packets for each interface (network and subscriber
interface) and ATM cell counter in both transmit and receive direction. Users can observe
these data through CLI and Web-GUI.
ADSL PM
The IDL-2402 provides the following ADSL PM statistics:
Item
Description
ATUC_LOS
ATUC_LOF
ATUC_LOM
ATUC_LOL
ATUC_ES
Loss of signal count
Loss of frame count
Loss of margin count
Loss of link count
Errored Seconds
ATUC_SES
ATUC_UAS
ATUC_ReInitCounter
Severely Errored Seconds
Unavailable Seconds
The number of times the modem left showtime and tried to
re-initialize the line because of detection of a persistent
defect
ATUC_FailedInitCounter
The number of times the modem tries to initialize the line
but fails.
- 50 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATUC_CU
ATUC_CD
ATUC_HEC
User Total Cell Count
Delineated Total Cell Count
ATM Header Error Count
Idle Cell Bit Error Count
The counter associated with the number of Coding
Violations encountered by the channel.
The counter associated with the number of corrected
codewords encountered by the channel.
Far End Loss of signal count
Far End Loss of frame count
Far End Loss of margin count
Far End Loss of power count
Far End Errored Seconds
ATUC_IBE
ATUC_CVS
ATUC_FECCS
ATUR_LOS
ATUR_LOF
ATUR_LOM
ATUR_LPR
ATUR_ES
ATUR_SES
ATUR_UAS
Far End Severely Errored Seconds
Far End Unavailable Seconds
ATUR_HEC
Far End ATM Header Error Count
Far End Idle Cell Bit Error Count
The far end counter associated with the number of Coding
Violations encountered by the channel.
ATUR_IBE
ATUR_CVS
ATUR_FECCS
The far end counter associated with the number of
corrected code words encountered by the channel.
The IDL-2402 provides the following ADSL PM thresholds:
NE threshold
FE threshold
15min ES threshold
15min SES threshold
15min UAS threshold
15min LOS threshold
15min LOF threshold
Not support
15min LOL threshold
15min ErrFrm threshold
24hour ES threshold
24hour SES threshold
24hour UAS threshold
15min ES threshold
15min SES threshold
15min UAS threshold
15min LOS threshold
Not support
15min LOPWR threshold
Not support
15min ErrFrm threshold
24hour ES threshold
24hour SES threshold
24hour UAS threshold
- 51 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.3.1 RMON Feature
The IDL-2402 supports performance statistics defined in RMON MIB groups 1 (Ethernet
statistics), 2 (history control), 3 (Ethernet history), 4 (alarm), 5 (event), and 6 (log) per
RFC 2819 for all network uplink 10/100/1000 ports. The supported parameters are as
follows:
Table 3-1
RMON ETH Statistics variables
Variable
Description
Rx DropEvents
Monitoring rx dropped packets
Rx Bytes
Monitoring rx bytes packets
Rx Packet
Monitoring rx packets
Rx BroadcastPkts
Rx MulticastPkts
Monitoring rx broadcast packets
Monitoring rx multicast packets
Monitoring rx error aligment packets
Monitoring rx undersize packets
Monitoring rx oversize packets
Monitoring rx fragments packets
Monitoring rx jabber packets
Monitoring tx single collision packets
Monitoring tx/rx 64 bytes
Rx CRC Align Errors
Rx Undersize Pkts
Rx Oversize Pkts
Rx Fragments
Rx Jabbers
Tx Collisions
Tx/Rx Pkts 64bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 65~127bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 128~255bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 256~511bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 512~1023bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 1024~1518bytes
Tx Bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 65 to 127 bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 128 to 255 bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 256 to 511 bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 512 to 1023 bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 1024 to 1518 bytes
Monitoring tx bytes packets
Tx Packet
Monitoring tx packets
Tx MulticastPkts
Monitoring tx multicast packets
Monitoring tx broadcast packets
Tx BroadcastPkts
Table 3-2
RMON ETH History Control variables
Variable
Description
Monitoring rx dropped packets
HistoryDropEvents
Historybytes
Monitoring rx bytes packets
Monitoring rx packets
HistoryPackets
HistoryBroadcastPkts
HistoryMulticastPkts
HistoryCRCAlignErrors
Monitoring rx broadcast packets
Monitoring rx multicast packets
Monitoring rx error aligment packets
- 52 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HistoryUndersizePkts
HistoryOversizePkts
HistoryFragments
HistoryJabbers
Monitoring rx undersize packets
Monitoring rx oversize packets
Monitoring rx fragments packets
Monitoring rx jabber packets
Monitoring tx single collision packets
Monitoring tx bytes
HistoryCollisions
HistoryTxBytes
HistoryTxPackets
HistoryTxMulticast
HistoryTxBroadcast
HistoryUtilization
Monitoring tx packets
Monitoring tx multicast
Monitoring tx broadcast
Monitoring tx Utilization
- 53 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.4 Fault Management
Fault management is conceptually partitioned into two levels: the system top level, and
interface-specific level. Both levels are alarm-level configurable and can be Major and
Minor. All the alarms are mask-able.
Fault management provides the alarm output through hardware output interface (on the
system front panel) and visible indicator (LED). The alarm/status indications are
automatically generated as a result of certain events/conditions. The IDL-2402 supports
query of all current alarm status. It is also able to keep 256 records of historical alarms
and events respectively.
The IDL-2402 provides the ability to group alarms in a hierarchical alarm presentation
scheme. Alarms of the same rank can exist at the same time. A lower-ranking alarm will
be demoted if a higher-ranking alarm is raised for the same object. For example, if a
far-end LOS is raised on a circuit and then a far-end LPR is raised on the circuit, the LPR
alarm stands and the LOS closes. The alarm hierarchy used in the IDL-2402 system is
shown in the following table:
Table 3-3
IDL-2402 Alarm Hierarchy
Priority
Alarm Type
Highest
all activation failures (ADSL_COMMF_FE or
ADSL_NOPEER_FE)
—
—
far-end LPR
near-end LOS or far-end LOS
Lowest
near-end LOF or far-end LOF (near-end and far-end are
independent; for example, FE-LOS does not restrain NE-LOF)
Note: 1.LOM, LCD, and NCD are not included in the alarm hierarchy; they’re treated
independently.
2.The PM counters LPR, LOS, and LOF follow the alarm hierarchy rule. When
these alarms exist at the same time, only the PM counter of a higher-ranking
alarm will count (the PM counters of other lower-ranking alarms will not).
System Alarms
The IDL-2402 provides the following System alarms:
„
„
„
„
„
Fan Failure Alarm
Above Temperature
Below Temperature
Self-test Fail
DSP Fail - you can see which DSP chip is fail from the user interface (Web GUI,
CLI, etc.). There is a number 1 ~ 4 in the alarm message/description
corresponding to the DSP chip 1 ~ chip 4
- 54 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADSL Alarms
The IDL-2402 provides the following ADSL alarms:
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
„
LOS (Loss of Signal) -Near End/Far End
LOF (Loss of Frame) -Near End/Far End
LOM (Loss of Margin) -Near End/Far End
LCD (Loss of Cell Delineation) -Near End/Far End
NCD (No Cell Delineation) -Near End/Far End
LOPWR (Loss of Power) -Far End
COMMF: Unable to communicate with peer modem -Far End
NOPEER: No peer present – Far End
- 55 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.5 Loopback Testing
The IDL-2402 supports ATM and ADSL loop diagnostics.
ATM:
The system provides F5 end-to-end or segment loopback.
ADSL:
The system provides Dual Ended Loop Testing (DELT) for each ADSL line on a per port
basis, according to the definition per section 8.12.3 of ITUT G992.3.
The following test parameters are supported:
-
-
-
-
-
Channel Characteristics Function H(f) per subcarrier (CCF-ps),
Quiet Line Noise PSD QLN(f) per subcarrier (QLN-ps),
Signal-to-Noise Ratio SNR(f) per subcarrier (SNR-ps),
Line Attenuation (LATN),
Signal Attenuation (SATN),
- Signal-to-Noise Ratio Margin (SNRM),
-
-
-
Attainable Net Data Rate (ATTNDR),
Far-end Actual Aggregate Transmit Power (ACTATP),
Near-End Actual Aggregate Transmit Power (ACTATP).
- 56 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.6 Cluster Feature
The IDL-2402 supports Cluster feature that can make a group of NEs (network elements)
work together as a single NE from the management point of view. Operators can manage
the NEs in a cluster, called cluster nodes, via the same single IP address in terms of CLI,
Web-based GUI or SNMP based management interfaces. The IDL-2402 currently
provides cluster feature that a cluster can include up to four cluster members (NEs).
There are one Master and the other members are all Slaves in a cluster. The Master
works as a gateway of the Slaves, and it also can forward CLI/Web/SNMP commands to
the destination Slave. The Slaves can execute the commands and respond to the Master.
It uses star topology for conducting a Clustering Management group.
Figure 3-2
Cluster network topology – Star
Before you group a Master and a Slave IPDSLAM, some parameters need to be well
configured:
1. Cluster domain name: The group name for a cluster must be the same on
Master and Slave.
2. Cluster IP address: IP address to be used for remote management when Master
and Slave are grouped together.
3. NE cluster name: A name to identify Master or Slave.
4. Set private IP address on in-band port for both Master and Slave IPDSLAM. The
private IP is used for communication between Master and Slave. The
management center actually uses Cluster IP address for remote management.
5. Master and Slave need to be configured with same management VLAN.
6. The default gateway should be configured to the router that is aware how to route
management traffic to Management Center of the management network. The
setting of Cluster default gateway should be the same between Master and
Slave.
- 57 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. WEB Management
Web Configuration Tool Overview
To access Web Configuration Tool on an IDL-2402:
1. Connect a PC to the console port of the DSLAM. At the console, type the following
CLI command:
WDS:>enable
/*enter the enable command mode from initial mode*/
WDS:%show management all /*display all in-band management IP setting*/
The default LAN IP address is got via DHCP.
2. At your web browser, enter the URL you retrieve by using the above command. If
you need to change the accessing port number (default is 80) of the Web
Configuration Tool, use the following CLI command (with the correct values added):
WDS:%configure
/*enter the configuration command mode from enable
mode*/
WDS:(conf)#http port <number>
/*set http port number*/
3. Logging in to Web Configuration Tool:
Once you connect to the DSLAM, a login page is displayed. You must enter your
username and password to access the pages. The default login username and password
are as follows:
User Name: admin
Password: admin
Click on the Sign in button.
You are now ready to configure your DSLAM using the Web Configuration Tool.
Figure 4-1
Web Configuration Tool login page
- 58 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. The following page is displayed. This is the homepage of the Web Configuration
Tool.
Figure 4-2
Web Configuration Tool homepage
- 59 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About Web Configuration Tool Pages
The Web Configuration Tool provides a series of web pages for users to setup and
configure the IDL-2402 System. These pages are organized into six main topics including
System, Bridge, ADSL, Traffic, SNMP, and Maintenance. You can select each topic
of the web configuration tool.
The exact information displayed on each web page depends on the specific configuration
that an operator is using. The following chapters provide a general description of the
setup and configuration details.
Table 4-1
Pages of the Web Configuration Tool
System
System Information
Board IP Setup
Ethernet Port Service
ADSL Port Service
CLI Setup
Cluster Setup
System Inventory
SNTP
IP Routes
User Administration
Duplicator
802.1x Security
Bridge
System Protocol
RADIUS & Local Profile
GIGA Bridge
ADSL PVC
Interface Setup
VLAN Configuration
Access Control
ADSL Bridge
ADSL Port Security
Static VLAN
Protocol Based VLAN
Translation VLAN
Static Allowed IP
MAC Spoofing
Filtering
VLAN Priority Remark
Rate Limit
Priority Queue Mapping
TP Forwarding DB
Forwarding Static
Forwarding
- 60 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relay
IGMP
DSL Line Identify
Protocol & Route Port
IGMP Profile
IGMP Multicast
BRAS MAC
IPOA
Interface Setup
Service Profile (main)
Service Profile (Channel)
Spectrum Profile (main)
Spectrum Profile (ADSLx)
TCA Profile
ADSL
Profile
Inventory
Loop Test
Data & Inventory
Line Config & Info
Carrier Data
OP Data
Line Configuration
Line Information
Traffic
SNMP
ATM Traffic Descriptor
SNMP Community
SNMP Target
SNMP Notify
Maintenance
SYS Log Server
Database
Firmware Update
ATM Loopbacks
Alarm/Event
Fault Management
Alarm Profile
Hardware Temp.
System Utilization
Ethernet Statistics
ATM Statistics
RMON
Performance Monitoring
ADSL Day/Interval
- 61 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1 System
4.1.1 System Information
The System Information page (the default page you’ll see after you login the web
configuration tool) contains information about the user access level, current system date
and time, current boot configuration partition, system MAC address, system HW/SW/FW
version, web configuration software version, supported subscriber line type (AnnexA or
AnnexB), GBE interface status, and LED status (SYS and ALM).
From the System menu, click on System Info. The following page is displayed:
System Information Page
- 62 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.2 Board IP Setup
This option allows you to configure the in band IP address setting, VID management
setting, HTTP port setting, etc. From the System menu, click on Board IP Setup. The
following page is displayed:
Board IP Setup Table
Label
Description
IP Address
Type in the IP address of the DSLAM for in-band management.
In Band
Address
Subnet Mask
No Limit VID
Limit VID
Type in the in-band subnet mask of the DSLAM.
Select this checkbox if no specific in-band management VLAN is
required, and the setting in "Limit VID" parameter will be ignored.
Inband VID
Management
The VLAN ID for individual in-band management VLAN.
Select the VLAN priority level (0~7) of the in-band management traffic
sent out from GBE port.
Priority
Shows current HTTP port setting for Web access. You can modify http
port setting in this field.
HTTP Port
Remote IP
Shows the IP address of the management PC currently connected to
this DLSAM.
System Name
Modify
You can modify the name of the system here.
Click on this button to submit the modification.
Click on this button to restart the system.
RESTART
- 63 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.3 Ethernet Port Service
This option allows you to set the administration state and select the speed mode for the
Gigabit Ethernet ports. From the System menu, click on Ethernet Port Service. The
following page is displayed:
Ethernet Port Service Setup
Description
Label
Port
This field shows port number of the Gigabit Ethernet interface.
Click on the drop-down list and select the administrative state
(ON/OFF) to enable/disable the GBE port.
Admin Status
Click on the drop-down list and select the speed mode for trunk
GBE port. Supported options are: AutoNegotiate, 100Mbps Half
(duplex), 100Mbps Full (duplex).
Selected Speed
Link Status
Show operational status of the trunk ports (ON/OFF).
Show current speed mode of the trunk ports.
Current Speed
Show current uplink transmission medium (via copper or SFP). This
field will show N/A when Oper Status is OFF.
Current Media
Modify
Click on this button to submit the modification.
- 64 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.4 ADSL Port Service
This option allows you to setup the service status of the line ports and to bind the
selected service profiles and spectrum profiles. Also, you can query current setting and
the operational status of the line ports. From the System menu, click on ADSL Port
Service. The following page is displayed:
First click on the drop-down list to select the port range to be displayed. Remember to
click on the radio button to select a port to be modified (or select the All checkbox to
modify all ports of the page at a time).
Table 0-1
ADSL Circuit Setup
Description
Label
Click on the drop-down list and select the Administrative status: ON, OFF, or
RESET.
Admin
Service Profile
Type in the index of the Service Profile (1~120).
Type in the index of the Spectrum Profile (1~120).
Spectrum Profile
- 65 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TCA Profile
All
Type in the index of the TCA Profile (1~64).
Select the check box to select all circuits of current page.
Click on this button to submit the modification.
Modify
Query
Select
Click on this button to get most recent status of the circuits.
Click on the radio button to select the port to be modified.
This field shows the operational status of the line ports. Possible values are
ON (enabled), OFF (disabled), and Testing (in loop testing now).
Current Status
- 66 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.5 CLI Setup
This option allows you to modify the timeout setting for a CLI session and the allowable number of
CLI sessions. From the System menu, click on CLI Setup.
CLI Setup
Label
CLI Session
Description
Allowable number of CLI sessions at the same time. Valid value: 1~10.
CLI session will be closed once the idle time exceeds this timeout value.
Valid value: 180~3600 (sec).
CLI Timeout
Click on this button to set default values (CLI session: 5, CLI timeout: 300
sec).
Default
Modify
Click on this button to submit the modification.
- 67 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.6 Cluster Setup
This option allows you to setup Cluster function, which can make a group of NEs (network
elements) work together as a single NE from the management point of view. Before you group a
Master and a Slave IPDSLAM, some parameters need to be well configured:
1. Cluster domain name: The group name for a cluster must be the same on Master and Slave.
2. Cluster IP address: IP address to be used for remote management when Master and Slave
are grouped together.
3. NE cluster name: A name to identify Master or Slave.
4. Set private IP address on in-band port for both Master and Slave IPDSLAM. The private IP is
used for communication between Master and Slave. The management center actually uses
Cluster IP address for remote management.
5. Master and Slave need to be configured with same management VLAN.
6. The default gateway should be configured to the router that is aware how to route
management traffic to Management Center of the management network. The setting of
Cluster default gateway should be the same between Master and Slave.
Currently a IDL-2402 cluster can support up to four cluster members (NEs). The IPDSLAMs in a
cluster must all be in-band connected through the GBE port. It uses star topology for conducting a
Clustering Management group.
Cluster network topology – Star
From the System menu, click on Cluster Setup. The following page is displayed:
By default, the DSLAM is not in a cluster. The state of the Cluster Configuration shows “IDLE” and
the Role shows “Individual”.
- 68 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To make the DSLAM join a cluster, select the Role as “Cluster” or “Slave only” according to your
plan and then click on Modify. The state of the Cluster Configuration will show from
DISCOVERING to VOTING to MASTER or SLAVE at last.
The following figure shows the Cluster Setup page of a cluster containing two cluster members.
You will see the following page if you’re connecting directly to the Master via its in-band IP
address or connecting to the Cluster IP “172.16.77.88”. You can control all the IP DSLAMs in a
cluster by connecting to the Cluster IP address, or by directly connecting to the Master IPDSLAM
via its in-band IP address that is configured in the Board IP Setup page (refer to section 4.1.2).
Cluster Setup
Label
Name
Description
Type in the NE name in the cluster.
Domain
Role
Type in the name of the cluster domain.
Valid options are: Cluster (Master or Slave is decided by the system), Slave only (role of the
DLSAM is always Slave), and Individual (not in a cluster).
Type in 0 or a positive integer as the priority to be Master. 0 means to let system decides
Master and Slaves. If positive integer is typed in, the smaller the number is, the higher priority
Voting Key
- 69 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
for the DSLAM to be a master in a cluster. But if there’s already a Master in a cluster, a new
added DSLAM cannot try to be the Master by entering a smaller voting key number; the
Master cannot be changed in this way.
Type in the cluster IP address. Users can connect to and manage the cluster via the cluster
IP address through in-band connection.
IP
Netmask
Gateway
ID
Type in the cluster’s subnet mask.
Type in the cluster’s gateway IP address.
This field shows Cluster ID, which indicates cluster ordering.
Click on this button to submit the modification.
Click on this button to query current status.
Modify
Query
To control a member in the cluster:
Select a Cluster member from the drop down list above the menu tree. Then you are controlling
that NE now.
Every time you modify the setting (for example, changing the Role) of any cluster member, the
cluster will be reconstructed (cluster state Discovering Æ Voting Æ Master or Slave).
If you modify the Role to “Individual”, Cluster State will show ‘IDLE’. The DSLAM is not in a cluster
now.
If you are directly connecting to a Slave in the cluster (connecting via its in-band IP address) you
cannot switch to any other member in the cluster.
- 70 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.7 System Inventory
This option allows you to retrieve the system inventory including Description of the
System, HW/FW/SW Version, Model Information, Part Number, Hardware Revision, and
Serial Number. From the System menu, click on System Inventory. Click on the Query
button. The following page is displayed:
- 71 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.8 System Contact Info
This option allows you to specify the system name, system contact, and system location.
From the System menu, click on System Contact Info. The following page is displayed:
Type in the value you desire, and then click on Modify to apply the setting. Click on
Query to verify if the value is changed.
- 72 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.9 SNTP
This option allows you to setup the Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP). From the
System menu, click on SNTP. The following page is displayed.
SNTP Setup
Label
Description
Sets the local time zone by selecting in the Time Zone drop-down list.
Sixty-five of the world’s time zones are presented (including those using
standard time and summer/daylight savings time).
Time Zone
System Date
System Time
Sets system date (yyyy/mm/dd).
Sets system time (hh:mm:ss).
Sets the polling interval (in seconds) that SNTP client will sync with a
designated SNTP server.
Polling Interval
Sets the dedicated unicast server IP address for which the SNTP client can
synchronize its time.
SNTP Server address
Modify
Click on this button to submit the modification.
- 73 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.10 IP Routes
This option allows you to configure the IP route table for the in-band management traffic.
From the System menu, click on IP Routes. The following page is displayed:
Click on the drop-down list to select the page to be displayed first.
IP Route Setup
Label
Description
This field shows current system default gateway. You can modify the
gateway address by typing in new value and then click on Set.
System Gateway
If the DSLAM is a Slave in a cluster, this field shows the in-band IP address
of the Master; if the DSLAM is a Master in a cluster, this field shows the IP
address of the Cluster gateway.
ADD Next
Destination
Net Mask
Gateway
Click on this button to add a new IP route.
Type in the destination IP address for the new IP route.
Type in the subnet mask for the new IP route.
Type in the IP address of the gateway for the new IP route.
Click on the radio button to select a route and then click on Delete to remove
this route from the table.
Delete Select
- 74 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.11 User Administration
This option allows you to administer accounts for users who access the DSLAM. From
the System menu, click on User Administration. Click on Select: drop-down list and select
a page to display. The following page is displayed:
User Administration
Label
Description
Page
Click on the drop-down list and select the page to be displayed.
Click on this button to create a new user. You will enter the following page:
New
Once you have typed in all the information for the new user, click on the
Create button.
Click on the radio button on the leftmost column of the user table to select
the user you want to delete / modify. Then click on Delete / Modify button.
Note that the default admin user cannot be deleted.
Delete / Modify
- 75 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
User Name
Level
Shows the name of the user (up to 32 characters).
The available access levels include:
SUPERUSER, ENGINEER, and GUEST.
Aging day
Start Date
Last Login
Comment
Set password expiration days (0 for no expiration days)
Shows the day when the account was first created.
Shows the day when a user last login.
Description about the user account (up to 31 characters).
When a new account is added: (for example, Test1 is added)
When user Test1 intends to login for the first time, he will be asked to change his
password and then login with the new password.
- 76 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.1.12 Duplicator
This option allows you to duplicate all/partial the configurations of one selected line port
(as a template) to other ports (as many as you want). From the System menu, click on
Duplicator. The following page is displayed. Select the content of configurations (ADSL
line configuration, ADSL profiles, or…) you want to duplicate first. Then specify the port
number as the template (the source port to be copied), and select the target ports to
which the template is going to be copied. At last click on Paste to apply.
- 77 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2 802.1x Security
4.2.1 System Protocol
This option allows you to enable/disable 802.1x authentication function of the system,
and setup the 802.1x authentication mechanism for each line bridge port. Before you
setup 802.1x for a line bridge port, you must create the ADSL PVC (bridge port) first.
Authentication
Server
(RADIUS)
Authenticator
(Our system)
Supplicant
(line user)
From the 802.1x Security menu, click on System Protocol. The following page is
displayed:
Main Setting
- 78 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Protocol Setup - Main Setting
Description
Label
System Authentication section
Click on the drop-down list to enable or disable the 802.1x authentication function of the system. If you
select “Disabled”, any setting in the Port Authentication section will not take effect.
Port Authentication section – Main Setting
Select the line bridge port range to be listed.
Remember to select the checkbox when you want to modify/delete the
Select Port
setting of a bridge port or set a bridge port to its default value.
OFF/ON: disable/enable 802.1x authentication function for the bridge
Enable
port. When 802.1x is disabled, the system allows bidirectional normal
traffic in this port in spite of its authentication state. Default is OFF.
OFF: notify RADIUS server to stop accounting for this port.
ON: notify RADIUS server to start accounting for this port.
Default is OFF.
Accounting Control
Accounting Interval
Type in the interval (300 ~ 600 sec) between accounting information
updates. Default is 300 sec.
Force-unAuth: cause the port to stay in the unauthorized state, ignoring
all attempts by the client to authenticate.
Force-Auth: disable 802.1X authentication and cause the port to
transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange
required.
Port Control
Auto: enable 802.1x authentication and cause the port to begin the
authentication process from unauthorized state.
Type in the number of times our system will send authentication requests
to Supplicant if no response from the Supplicant is received. Default value
is 2.
Max
Authenication
Request
OFF: disable re-authentication after a period of time
ON: enable re-authentication after a period of time
Default is OFF.
ReAuthentication Control
Max Request
Type in the number of times our system will send authentication
requests to the authentication server (RADIUS) if no response from the
server is received. Default value is 2.
ReAuthentication
- 79 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Timer Setting
- 80 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
System Protocol Setup – Timer setting
Description
Label
Port Authentication section – Timer Setting
Select the line bridge port range to be listed.
Remember to select the checkbox when you want to modify/delete the
setting of a bridge port or set a bridge port to its default value.
Select Port
Type in the number of seconds our system will wait for a response before
resending the request to the supplicant. Default is 60 (sec).
Supplicant Timeout
Server Timeout
Type in the number of seconds our system will wait for a reply before
resending the response to the authentication server. Default is 60 (sec).
Type in the number of seconds our system will wait for a response to an
EAP-request/identity frame from the supplicant before resending the
request. Default is 30 (sec).
Tx Period
Type in the number of seconds between re-authentication requests. Default
is 3600 (sec).
ReAuthentication Period
Quiet Period
Type in the number of seconds that our system remains in the quiet state
following a failed authentication exchange with the supplicant. Default is 60
(sec).
- 81 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.2.2 RADIUS &Local Profile
The IDL-2402 system supports RADIUS client function for authenticating line ports with local
authentication database or remote RADIUS server. From the 802.1x Security menu, click on
RADIUS & Local Profile. The following page is displayed:
RADIUS & Local Profile Setup
Label
Description
Authentication Method section
In this section, operators setup four AAA methods for the system to use, and the priority order is Method1 >
Method2 > Method3 > Method4. If a user cannot be authenticated when the system uses Method1, the
system will then try to use Method2, and so on. Click on the AAA method drop-down list and select a
RADIUS server index or the local profile, which has been already configured in the RADIUS Server section
or Local Profile section. At last click on Modify button.
RADIUS Server section
Remember to select the checkbox when you want to modify or delete a
RADIUS server entry.
Select (Index#n)
RADIUS Server IP
Type in the IP address of the remote RADIUS server.
Type in the port number for RADIUS Authentication in the Layer-4
header. Default is 1812.
Authentication Port
Type in the port number for RADIUS Accounting in the Layer-4 header.
Default is 1813.
Accounting Port
- 82 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type in the maximum allowable times of continuously failed
authentication attempts.
Max Fail
VLAN ID
Type in the VID of the VLAN which the RADIUS server belongs to.
Type in the authentication key in text format.
Secret ID
Local Profile section
Click on the drop-down list and select the profile range to be listed.
There are total 8 pages and 8 profiles per page (up to 64 local profiles
can be set in our system).
Username
Password
Type in the username for authentication.
Type in the password for authentication.
- 83 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3 Bridge
4.3.1 Interface Setup
4.3.1.1 GIGA Bridge
This option allows you to setup the GBE (trunk) bridge interface. From the Bridge menu,
click on Interface Setup and then GIGA Bridge. The following page is displayed:
GIGA (Trunk) Bridge Setup
Label
Description
Click on the drop-down list and specify the trunk port to be an Uplink or User
(especially for system stacking).
Mode
VID
Type in the default port VLAN ID. Valid value is 1 ~ 4094.
Type in the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the giga
bridge port (1 ~ 4096).
Max MAC
VLAN setting for the traffic. Includes three drop-down lists:
Pri-0 ~ 7: Set the default VLAN priority level.
UnTagged/Tagged: Select to untag / tag the outgoing (upstream direction for
trunk bridge ports) packets. If UnTagged is selected, a double-tagged packet will
leave single-tagged (the outer most VLAN tag is removed) and a single-tagged
packet will leave untagged.
VLAN
no Stack/Stack: Disable/Enable N:1 VLAN stacking (our system adds the
default VLAN tag to all the incoming frames through this port).
Note: When an untagged frame enters the IDL-2402, it is assigned the default
PVID of the ingress (incoming) bridge port and become a single-tagged frame
no matter VLAN stacking is enabled or not.
Set Ingress ON: check if the VID of the incoming frame is in the member set. If
not in the member set, block the frame.
Ingress
Set Ingress OFF: Ingress filter disabled.
Click on the drop-down list and select to accept ALL Frame, only VLAN tagged
frame, or only Untagged frame.
Acc.Frm
- 84 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ON/OFF: to enable/disable isolation. When port isolation is enabled, packets
received from a trunk port (when both the trunk interfaces are configured as
up-link) cannot be forwarded to the other trunk port even for broadcasting.
Isol
To modify the configuration of a giga port:
1. Click on the radio button to select trunk port 1
2. Change the parameter values
Modify
Query
3. Click on Modify button to apply new values
Click on this button to query current status.
- 85 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.1.2 ADSL PVC
This option allows you to setup the ADSL PVC. From the Bridge menu, click on Interface
Setup and then ADSL PVC. The following page is displayed:
You shall click on the drop-down lists to select port range and PVC first. Then the data of
these PVCs (bridge ports) you selected will be displayed. Click on the radio button to
select the PVC you want to create, modify, or delete.
ADSL PVC Setup
Label
Description
VPI
VCI
Type in the VPI value: 0 ~ 255. Default value is 0.
Type in the VCI value: 21, 32 ~ 65535. Default value is 35.
Click on the drop-down list and select a traffic type for transmit and receive
direction respectively. Available options are created in the ATM Traffic
Descriptor page. See section 4.5.1
Traffic
- 86 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select AAL5 Encapsulation Type: VCMUX, LLC, or AUTO (for PVC#1 ~
PVC#4 only)*.
Encap
Select in the drop-down list to enable or disable protocol based VLAN
function. When protocol based VLAN is enabled, the bridge port will work
according to the protocol based VLAN table (refer to section 4.3.2).
Protocol Based VLAN
Select the check box to copy specified circuit to all remainder circuits in
current page.
All
Click on the radio button to select a PVC (bridge port) that has not been
created. Set the parameter values and then click on Create to create a PVC.
Create
Modify
Click on the radio button to select the PVC (bridge port) you want to modify.
Change the parameter values and then click on Modify.
Click on the radio button to select the PVC (bridge port) you want to delete.
Then click on Delete to remove the PVC.
Delete
Query
Click on this button to get the most recent data.
*The IDL-2402 supports auto-detection of the ATM AAL5 encapsulation method, LLC or
VC-Mux. Meanwhile, the IDL-2402 is also able to automatically sense the following
protocol encapsulations: PPPoE over ATM (per RFC 2684), IPoE over ATM bridge mode,
and PPP over ATM. IPoA works on individual PVC.
However, there are limitations on auto-detection of encapsulations:
1. LLC/VC-Mux automatically detection is only applicable to PVC#1 ~ PVC#4 of each
ADSL port. PVC#5 ~ PVC#8 must be assigned the ATM AAL5 encapsulation method
manually.
2. PPPoA works only for PVC#1 ~ PVC#4 and the LLC/VC-Mux automatically detection
must be enabled.
Refer to section 4.3.7 for IPoA configuration.
- 87 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.1.3 ADSL Bridge
This option allows you to setup the ADSL bridge interface. From the Bridge menu, click
on Interface Setup and then ADSL Bridge. The following page is displayed:
You shall click on the drop-down lists to select port range and PVC first. Then the data of
these PVCs (bridge ports) you selected will be displayed. Click on the radio button to
select the bridge port you want to modify.
ADSL Bridge Setup
Label
Description
VID
Type in the default port VLAN ID. Valid value is 1 ~ 4094.
VLAN setting for the egress traffic. Includes three drop-down lists:
VLAN
UnTagged/Tagged: select untagging/tagging the outgoing frames
(downstream direction for line bridge port). If UnTagged is selected, a
double-tagged packet will leave single-tagged (the outer most VLAN tag is
- 88 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
removed) and a single-tagged packet will leave untagged.
Pri-0 ~ 7: set the default VLAN priority level.
no Stack/Stack/TLS: disable N:1 VLAN stacking / enable N:1 VLAN
stacking (our system adds the default VLAN tag to all the incoming frames
through this port) / enable TLS (transparent LAN service) so that this bridge
port becomes VLAN transparent (refer to DSL Forum, TR-101). A
pre-configured S-Tag is used to encapsulate TLS traffic going through this
port. That is, an S-Tag (PVID here) will be added to all the upstream frames
received on this port, and the C-Tags will be the original tags of these
frames (no C-Tag for untagged incoming frames). On the other hand, the
S-tag will be removed from all the downstream (outgoing) frames.
Note: When an untagged frame enters the IDL-2402, it is assigned the
default PVID of the ingress (incoming) bridge port and become a
single-tagged frame no matter VLAN stacking is enabled or not.
Set Ingress ON: check if the VID of the incoming frame is in the member set. If
not in the member set, block the frame.
Ingress
AccFrm
Isolation
Set Ingress OFF: Ingress filter disabled.
Click on the drop-down list and select to accept ALL Frame, only VLAN tagged
frame, or only Untagged frame.
ON/OFF: to enable/disable isolation. When port isolation is enabled, packets
received from a line bridge port (including trunk interface configured as
user-link) cannot be forwarded to any other line bridge port even for
broadcasting.
Click on the drop-down list and select the priority-forcing mode. Options are:
Disabled: Reserve the original priority of all packets.
Ingress: Force applying the default VLAN priority value to all the packets
received on this bridge port (so this rule will work on all the
member-set of this bridge port).
Priority Force
Egress: Force the priority value of all packets sent out from this bridge port’s
default VLAN to be the default VLAN priority (so this rule only works
on default VLAN of this bridge port).
Both: Combine the rules of Ingress and Egress.
Select the check box to copy specified circuit to all remainder circuits in current
page.
All
Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify. Change
the parameter values and then click on Modify.
Modify
Query
Click on this button to get the most recent data.
- 89 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.1.4 ADSL Port Security
This option allows you to setup the ADSL port security. From the Bridge menu, click on
Interface Setup and then ADSL Port Security. The following page is displayed:
You shall click on the drop-down lists to select port range and PVC first. Then the data of
these PVCs (bridge ports) you selected will be displayed. Click on the radio button to
select the bridge port you want to modify.
ADSL Port Security Setup
Label
Description
Type in the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the
ADSL bridge port (1 ~ 128).
Max MAC
Select to enable/disable MAC learning ability. Sometimes you can disable
MAC learning on specified bridge port. This function is for 1:1 VLAN
translation scenario.
MAC Learning
IP Allowed
Select to enable/disable IP Allowed function. When you enable IP Allowed
function on a bridge port, this bridge port will work according to the Static
Allowed IP table (refer to section 4.3.2).
- 90 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
So you need to define the source IP addresses that bind to this bridge port.
Then the IP packets that contain these source IP addresses can pass
through this bridge port; otherwise the packets will be blocked.
Select the check box to copy specified circuit to all remainder circuits in
current page.
All
Click on the radio button to select the bridge port you want to modify.
Change the parameter values and then click on Modify.
Modify
Query
Click on this button to get the most recent data.
- 91 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.2 VLAN Configuration
4.3.2.1 Static VLAN
This option allows you to configure the static VLAN table. From the Bridge menu, click on
VLAN Configuration and then Static VLAN. The following page is displayed. Click on the
radio button to select CONFIG VLAN to configure static VLAN for the bridge ports or
SHOW VLAN to display the VLAN table.
CONFIG VLAN
Click on the drop-down list to select ADSL or GIGA port, and then select a port and PVC if
ADSL is selected. Once you have selected the bridge interface, its current static VLAN
setting is displayed. To add a new VLAN member, type in VID for the New VID field and
then select Tagged/UnTagged for VLAN Tag, ON/OFF for Isolation, and VLAN priority
level (specify a number or reserve the original value) for Priority. At last click on
Create==> button. To modify or delete a VLAN, select the checkboxes of the entries you
want to modify or delete and then click on Modify or Delete button.
- 92 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SHOW VLAN
In the following page, type in the VID and then click on Query. All the bridge ports
belonging to the VLAN and the configuration data of these ports will be displayed in the
table.
- 93 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.2.2 Protocol Base VLAN
This option allows you to configure the protocol based VLAN table. From the Bridge
menu, click on VLAN Configuration and then Protocol Base VLAN. The following page is
displayed. Select the checkboxes of the entries you want to create or delete. To create a
new entry, type in the VLAN ID and select the EtherType (protocol). If you select Other
for EtherType, type the EtherType value in the rightmost field.
- 94 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.2.3 Translation VLAN
This option allows you to configure the translation VLAN table, which defines some
special VLAN working rules such as VLAN stack, VLAN cross-connect, etc. Before you
configure the Translation VLAN table for a line bridge port, you shall configure the Static
VLAN table for this line bridge port and the GIGA bridge port in advance. Also, you shall
disable VLAN stacking feature of this line bridge port in the ADSL bridge interface setup
page (refer to section 4.3.1), otherwise the VLAN translation rule here will not take effect.
From the Bridge menu, click on VLAN Configuration and then Translation VLAN. The
following page is displayed. Click on the radio button to select translation Mode first.
Actually the IDL-2402 provides five translation modes: four for 1:1 VLAN, one for N: 1
VLAN (refer to DSL Forum TR-101).
1:1 VLAN (including 1:1 User Mode and C_VLAN Stacking Replaced Mode):
If the ADSL user bridge port only has 1:1 VLAN, then MAC learning function of this bridge
port can be disabled.
1. Reserved
In this mode, the system does not make any change on C-Tag. That is the
uplink port’s S-Tag is actually the C-Tag. The system provides a tunnel for the
user port and uplink port. And one VLAN ID can only make one tunnel.
2. Replaced
In this mode, the system will change the user port’s C-Tag to the Uplink port’s
S-Tag. And the mapping is one to one, that is, one user port’s C-Tag (one VID)
can only translate to one uplink port’s S-Tag (one VID), and vice versa. For
example, for ADSL Port1-PVC1, if ADSL VID 5 translates to GIGA1 VID 1, then
you cannot make ADSL VID 5 translate to another GIGA VID. You also cannot
make another ADSL VID translate to GIGA VID1.
- 95 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Upstream:
C-TagÆ(User port)-----(Uplink port)ÆS-Tag
Downstream:
S-TagÆ(Uplink port)-----(User port)ÆC-Tag
3. Stacking
In this mode, the system will add S-TAG before user port’s C-TAG. Note that
the mapping from C-Tag to S-Tag+C-Tag is still one to one. So a user port’s
C-Tag can’t be used for another translation rule, as well as an uplink port’s
S-Tag+C-Tag.
Upstream:
C-TagÆ(User port)-------(Uplink port)ÆS-Tag+C-Tag
Downstream:
S-Tag+C-TagÆ(Uplink port)--------(User port)ÆC-Tag
4. Stacking and Replaced
In this mode, the system will replace the user port’s C-Tag to C’-Tag and add
S-Tag before C’-Tag. Note that the mapping from C-Tag to S-Tag+C’-Tag is
still one to one. So a user port’s C-Tag can’t be used for another translation
rule, as well as an uplink port’s S-Tag+C’-Tag.
Upstream:
C-TagÆ(User port)-------(Uplink port)ÆS-Tag+C’-Tag
Downstream:
S-Tag+C’-TagÆ(Uplink port)--------(User port)ÆC-Tag
- 96 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N:1 VLAN (N:1 User Mode):
N:1 can also be called shared VLAN, so in this mode MAC learning function of the bridge
ports must not be disabled.
1. Replaced N:1
In this mode, the system will change the user port’s C-Tag to the Uplink port’s
S-Tag. And the mapping is N to 1, so a user port’s C-Tag can’t be used for
another VLAN translation rule. But an uplink port’s S-Tag can be used for
another N:1 VLAN translation rule.
So in this mode several bridge ports can have the same VLAN cross-connect
rule.
- 97 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.2.4 Static Allowed IP
This option allows you to configure the Static Allowed IP table. From the Bridge menu,
click on VLAN Configuration and then Static Allowed IP. The following page is displayed.
To make bridge port work according to this Static Allowed IP table, the IP allowed function
must be enabled (refer to section 4.3.1).
Click on the drop-down lists to select ADSL port and PVC number, then type in VID and
allowed source IP that can pass through the VLAN.
- 98 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.2.5 MAC Spoofing
This option allows you to enable/disable anti-MAC Spoofing function and MAC-Spoofing
detection log function. From the Bridge menu, click on VLAN Configuration and then
MAC Spoofing. The following page is displayed.
MAC Spoofing Setup
Label
Description
Click on the drop-down list to select:
OFF: The system is able to provide service to users with duplicate MAC
Spoofing
addresses.
ON: The system is able to deny service to users with duplicate
Click on the drop-down list to select:
Log
OFF: No log of MAC spoofing data when detected.
ON: The system provides log when duplicated MAC addresses detected.
Set
Click on this button to apply the setting.
Click on this button to get the MAC spoofing information (the Log function
must be enabled).
Query
- 99 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.3 Access Control
4.3.3.1 Filtering
This option allows you to setup the filter rule for the packets. From the Bridge menu, click
on Access Control and then Filtering. The following page is displayed. Click on Filtering
Type drop-down list to select a filtering type first.
Protocol Filtering
Protocol Filtering Setup
Label
Filtering Type
Description
You can also select the filtering type here.
Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table. Valid number
value: 1 ~ 256.
No. From…To…
Query
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
display the filter rules.
- 100 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
delete the filter rules in the table.
Delete
Click on these drop-down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Click on this drop-down list and select a protocol to deny: ICMP, IGMP,
IP in IP, TCP, GRP, IGP, UDP, GRE, EIGRP, or OSPF.
Protocol
Create
Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table.
Source MAC Filtering
Source MAC Filtering Setup
Description
Label
Filtering Type
You can also select the filtering type here.
Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table. Valid number
value: 1 ~ 256.
No. From…To…
Query
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
display the filter rules.
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
delete the filter rules in the table.
Delete
Click on these drop-down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Source MAC
Create
Type in the MAC Address of the source.
Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table.
- 101 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Address Filtering
Source IP Address Filtering Setup
Description
Label
Filtering Type
You can also select the filtering type here.
Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table. Valid number
value: 1 ~ 256.
No. From…To…
Query
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
display the filter rules.
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
delete the filter rules in the table.
Delete
Click on these drop-down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Source IP
MASK
Type in the IP Address of the source.
Type in the subnet mask.
Create
Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table.
- 102 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Layer 4 Destination Port Filtering
Layer 4 Destination Port Filtering Setup
Label
Filtering Type
Description
You can also select the filtering type here.
Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table. Valid number
value: 1 ~ 256.
No. From…To…
Query
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
display the filter rules.
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
delete the filter rules in the table.
Delete
Click on these drop-down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Destination Port
Create
Type in the Destination Port number (1 ~ 65535).
Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table.
- 103 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Destination IP Filtering
Destination IP Filtering Setup
Description
Label
Filtering Type
You can also select the filtering type here.
Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table. Valid number
value: 1 ~ 256.
No. From…To…
Query
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
display the filter rules.
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
delete the filter rules in the table.
Delete
Click on these drop-down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Destination IP
MASK
Type in the Destination IP address.
Type in the subnet mask.
Create
Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table.
- 104 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Destination MAC Filtering
Destination MAC Filtering Setup
Label
Filtering Type
Description
You can also select the filtering type here.
Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table. Valid number
value: 1 ~ 256.
No. From…To…
Query
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
display the filter rules.
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
delete the filter rules in the table.
Delete
Click on these drop-down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Destination MAC
Create
Type in the Destination MAC address.
Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table.
- 105 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ether Type Filtering
Ether Type Filtering Setup
Description
Label
Filtering Type
You can also select the filtering type here.
Type in the range of serial number in the filter rule table. Valid number
value: 1 ~ 256.
No. From…To…
Query
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
display the filter rules.
Once you have specified the serial number, click on this button to
delete the filter rules in the table.
Delete
Click on these drop-down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Incoming Ether Type
Create
Type in the EtherType value (hexadecimal).
Click on this button to create a new filter rule in the table.
- 106 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.3.2 VLAN Priority Remark
This option allows you to configure the VLAN priority. From the Bridge menu, click on
Access Control and then VLAN Priority Remark. The following page is displayed:
Click on the VPRI Remark drop-down list and select a type of VLAN Priority Remark.
Available options include Type of Service (TOS), IP Source, IP Destination, MAC Source,
MAC Destination, VLAN ID, VLAN Priority Regeneration, Differentiated Services (DSCP),
Protocol, and Ether Type.
- 107 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TOS
VLAN Priority Remark Setup - TOS
Description
Label
VPRI Remark
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
Query
Delete
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
In order to provide basic support for classes of service to the Internet
Protocol. The IP protocol header contains what is known as the ToS
(Type of Service) bits.
TOS
Click on the drop-down list and select incoming TOS (value range 0 ~
7), then you can create the mapping between TOS and VLAN priority.
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~
7).
Priority (Out)
Create
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
- 108 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Source
VLAN Priority Remark Setup – IP Source
Description
Label
VPRI Remark
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
Query
Delete
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Source IP
MASK
Type in the IP address of the coming source.
Type in the subnet mask.
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~
7).
Priority (Out)
Create
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
- 109 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IP Destination
VLAN Priority Remark Setup – IP Destination
Description
Label
VPRI Remark
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
Query
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Delete
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Source IP
MASK
Type in the IP address of the coming source.
Type in the subnet mask.
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~ 7).
Priority (Out)
Create
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
- 110 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAC Source
VLAN Priority Remark Setup – MAC Source
Description
Label
VPRI Remark
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
Query
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Delete
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Source MAC
Priority (Out)
Type in the MAC Address of the coming source.
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~ 7).
Create
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
- 111 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAC Destination
VLAN Priority Remark Setup – MAC Destination
Description
Label
VPRI Remark
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
Query
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Delete
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Destination MAC
Priority (Out)
Type in the MAC Address of the destination.
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~ 7).
Create
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
- 112 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VLAN ID
VLAN Priority Remark Setup – VLAN ID
Description
Label
VPRI Remark
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
Query
Delete
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
VLAN ID
Type in the VLAN ID (1 ~ 4094).
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~ 7).
Priority (Out)
Create
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
- 113 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VLAN Priority Regeneration
VLAN Priority Remark Setup – VLAN Priority Regeneration
Label
VPRI Remark
Description
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
Query
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Delete
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Click on the drop-down list and select the incoming VLAN Priority (0 ~ 7).
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~ 7).
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
Priority (In)
Priority (Out)
Create
- 114 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Differentiated Services
VLAN Priority Remark Setup – Differentiated Services
Label
VPRI Remark
Description
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
Query
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Delete
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Click on the drop-down list and select the incoming DSCP (Diffserv Code
Points, which is a 6-bit number).
The standardized combinations are listed below:
default
af11
Default value (bits:000000)
Assured Forwarding Class 1:Low Drop (bits:001010)
Assured Forwarding Class 1:Medium Drop (bits:001100)
Assured Forwarding Class 1:High Drop (bits:001110)
Assured Forwarding Class 2:Low Drop (bits:010010)
Assured Forwarding Class 2:Medium Drop (bits:010100)
Assured Forwarding Class 2:High Drop (bits:010110)
Incoming DS
af12
af13
af21
af22
af23
- 115 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
af31
af32
af33
af41
af42
af43
ef
Assured Forwarding Class 3:Low Drop (bits:011010)
Assured Forwarding Class 3:Medium Drop (bits:011100)
Assured Forwarding Class 3:High Drop (bits:011110)
Assured Forwarding Class 4:Low Drop (bits:100010)
Assured Forwarding Class 4:Medium Drop (bits:100100)
Assured Forwarding Class 4:High Drop (bits:100110)
Expedited Forwarding (bits:101110)
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~ 7).
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
Priority (Out)
Create
- 116 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Protocol
VLAN Priority Remark Setup – Protocol
Description
Label
VPRI Remark
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
Query
Delete
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Click on the drop-down list and select the incoming protocol.
Available options are:
Incoming Protocol
ICMP, IGMP, IP in IP, TCP, GRP, IGP, UDP, GRE, IGRP, or OSPF.
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~ 7).
Priority (Out)
Create
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
- 117 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Ether Type
VLAN Priority Remark Setup – Ether Type
Description
Label
VPRI Remark
You can also select the priority remark type here.
Type in the range of entry number in the table you want to view (value
range is 1~256).
No. From …To…
To query entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to retrieve.
Query
Delete
To delete entries, type in the entry number range and then click on this
button to delete.
Click on these drop-down list to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Incoming EtherType
Priority (Out)
Type in the EtherType value (hexadecimal).
Click on the drop-down list and select the outgoing VLAN priority (0 ~ 7).
Create
Click on this button to create a new entry in the table.
- 118 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.3.3 Rate Limit
This option allows you to limit the rate of broadcast/multicast packets that are received on
a VLAN, and configure the Three Color Marking (TCM) Policer profile. From the Bridge
menu, click on Access Control and then Rate Limit. The following page is displayed. Click
on the Rate Limit Type drop-down list and select the item you want to setup.
„
Rate Limit Broadcast
Rate Limit Broadcast Setup
Description
Label
Rate Limit Type
Click on this drop-down list and select the item you want to setup.
Committed Information Rate (1536 ~ 1G bits per second). The threshold
rate to turn on the rate-limit mechanism.
Committed Information Rate
Leaky Bucket
Leaky bucket size. The unit is millisecond. This parameter ranges from 1
to 1024. The bucket depth is the product of CIR and this parameter.
Modify
Query
Click on this button to modify data in the table.
Click on this button to get most recent status.
- 119 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
„
Rate Limit Flooding
Rate Limit Flooding Setup
Description
Label
Rate Limit Type
Click on this drop-down list and select the item you want to setup.
Type in VLAN ID (1 ~ 4094). The VLAN must have been created in the
static VLAN table.
Flooding VID
Committed Information Rate (1536 ~ 1G bits per second). The threshold
rate to turn on the rate-limit mechanism.
Committed Information Rate
Leaky Bucket
Leaky bucket size. The unit is millisecond. This parameter ranges from 1
to 1024. The bucket depth is the product of CIR and this parameter.
Modify
Query
Click on this button to modify data in the table.
Click on this button to get most recent status.
To delete a VID entry, type in the VID number and then click on this button
to delete.
Delete
- 120 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
„
Rate Limit Policer profile
The IDL-2402 supports two kinds of TCM Policer: two-rate TCM (with dual leaky buckets)
and single-rate TCM (with single leaky bucket).
The single-rate TCM meters a traffic stream and marks its packets according to
Committed Information Rate (CIR) and Committed Burst Size (CBS) to be either green,
or red. The single-rate TCM operates with a single leaky bucket that is updated according
to only one rate, the committed information rate - CIR. A packet is marked green if the
leaky bucket is not full and red otherwise.
The two-rate TCM meters a traffic stream and marks its packets based on two rates,
Committed Information Rate (CIR) and Excess Information Rate (EIR), and their
associated burst sizes, Committed Burst Size (CBS) and Excess Burst Size (EBS), to be
either green, yellow, or red. The two-rate TCM operates with dual leaky bucket, where
each bucket is updated according to a different rate. The first bucket is updated
according to the CIR, the second bucket is updated according to the EIR. A packet is
marked red if it exceeds the PIR. Otherwise it is marked either yellow or green depending
on whether it exceeds or doesn’t exceed the EIR.
- 121 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rate Limit Poicer Setup
Description
Label
Rate Limit Type
Click on this drop-down list and select the item you want to setup.
Click on this drop-down list and select a page to be displayed.
Select
Select the checkbox when you want to create/modify/delete this entry.
Share mode: All the bridge ports which bind to the share mode policer
profile will share the same Leaky Bucket defined by the CIR,
EIR…parameters. So in Share mode, system only creates one Leaky
Bucket for all the binding bridge ports.
Share Mode
No Share mode:
Every bridge port which bind to the non-share policer profile will
have its own Leaky Bucket.
Single: Single Leaky Bucket. For SLB, there is one controlling parameter:
CIR.
LB Mode
Dual: Dual Leaky Bucket. For DLB, there are two controlling parameters:
CIR and EIR.
Committed Information Rate (1536 ~ 1G bits per second) controls the
number of tokens in the first bucket (CBS bucket).
CIR
Excess Information Rate (1536 ~ 1G bits per second) controls the number
of tokens in the second bucket (EBS bucket).
EIR
1st Leaky Bucket Size. The unit is millisecond. This parameter ranges from
1 to 1024. The first bucket depth is the product of CIR and this parameter.
1st LBS
2nd Leaky Bucket Size. The unit is millisecond. This parameter ranges
from 1 to 1024. The second bucket depth is the product of EIR and this
parameter.
2nd LBS
Modify
Query
Delete
Click on this button to modify an entry in the rate limit table.
Click on this button to retrieve the entries in the table.
Click on this button to delete the entries in the table.
- 122 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
„
Rate Limit Policer Binding Table
The Rate Limit Policer Binding Table allows you to specify which Policer profile to bind
and the binding status for a trunk or line bridge port.
Rate Limit Policer Binding Setup
Label
Rate Limit Type
Description
Click on this drop-down list and select the item you want to setup.
Click on these drop-down lists to select an ADSL bridge port or GIGA
bridge port.
Once you have finished setting the parameter values, click on this
button to submit the modification.
Modify
Query
Select
Click on this button to get most recent data.
Remember to select the checkbox when you want to modify this
entry.
Click on the drop-down list and select the Policer profile you want to
bind with this port.
Policer No.
Binding Status
Select to bind (ON) or unbind (OFF) the Policer profile.
- 123 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
„
Three Color Marking Policer
The IDL-2402 supports TCM Policer in accordance with the Metro Ethernet Forum (MEF)
Bandwidth Profile and RFCs 2697 & 2698. Our TCM Policer supports both Color Aware
and Color Blind modes. The “color” is used for determining whether a packet will proceed
to the policer when TCM Policer works in Color Aware mode; also in the policer the
packet may be remarked with new color according to the packet’s conformance to the
policer rules. A packet is considered green when it enters the TCM Policer only if its input
color field, VLAN priority bits or DSCP field, has the same value with the green value
configured in this page (see the following figure and parameter description). Likewise, a
packet is considered yellow only if its input color field has the same value with the yellow
value configured in this page. All other values are considered red.
Once a packet has passed through the TCM Policer, it will be directed to the class
queues for scheduling.
Rate Limit Policer Binding Setup
Label
Description
Rate Limit Type
Click on this drop-down list and select the item you want to setup.
Once you have finished setting the parameter values, click on this button to
submit the modification.
Modify
Query
Click on this button to get most recent data.
Color aware mode: the packets are classified before they’re sent through the
policer.
Color Aware
Color blind mode: the packets are directed through the entire policer regardless
of their color.
There are two fields you can select for determining the packet’s input color: the
VLAN priority bits within the Ethernet header or the DSCP field within the IP
header.
Color Field
This parameter defines the action for non-conforming packets. You can choose
Tag or Discard. If Tag is chosen, then all the packets will be marked as red in the
Color field rather than be discarded.
Packet Mode
- 124 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type in the green color value that is used when determining a packet’s input color
(for Color Aware mode) or remarking a packet’s output color as green. Valid value
is 0 ~ 7 for VLAN Priority color field or 0 ~ 63 for DSCP color field.
Green Value
Type in the yellow color value that is used when determining a packet’s input
color (for Color Aware mode) or remarking a packet’s output color as yellow. Valid
value is 0 ~ 7 for VLAN Priority color field or 0 ~ 63 for DSCP color field.
Yellow Value
Red Value
Type in the red color value that is used when remarking a packet’s output color as
red. Valid value is 0 ~ 7 for VLAN Priority color field or 0 ~ 63 for DSCP color field.
- 125 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.3.4 Priority Queue Mapping
This web page is used to select SPQ/WFQ/WRR queuing mechanism and to setup the
mapping between VLAN priority levels and system internal queues. From the Bridge
menu, click on Access Control and then Priority Queue Mapping. The following page is
displayed:
The queues for Giga and ATM interfaces are different.
Giga:
The Giga interface has 4 Queues and these queues can only work on Strict Priority
Queuing (SPQ) scheduling. The priorities of these queues are: Q3 > Q2 > Q1 > Q0.
ATM:
Each ATM PVC bridge interface on each ADSL port has 8 Queues and can work in SPQ
or SPQ/WFQ mix mode.
For SPQ, the priorities of these queues are: Q7 > Q6 > Q5 > Q4 > Q3 > Q2 > Q1 > Q0.
For SPQ/WFQ mixed, the priority of SPQ queues (Q7~Q4) is higher than WFQ queues
(Q3~Q0).
And:
Q7 ~ Q4 are for SPQ and the priorities are Q7 > Q6 > Q5 > Q4.
Q3 ~ Q0 are for WFQ (Weighted Fair Queuing) and you can define the weight value for
Q3 ~ Q0.
Note that if each queue has different weight value, the system will work as WFQ mode. If
all queues have the same weight value, the system will work as Weighted Round Robin
(WRR) mode.
The system allows 8 priority levels fully work as WFQ or WRR mode, via using queues of
Q3 ~ Q0 only in the Priority Queue Mapping table.
- 126 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.4 Forwarding
4.3.4.1 TP Forwarding DB
This option allows you to retrieve the status of the transparent forwarding database. The
forwarding table will reveal the information of MAC addresses that are learned or
statically configured on a specific bridge port. From the Bridge menu, click on Forwarding
and then TP Forwarding DB. The following page is displayed.
TP Forwarding DB
Label
Description
Type in the aging time in seconds. An entry will be removed from the
FDB (aged-out) if the device does not transmit for a specified period of
time (the aging time).
Aging Time
Modify
Click on this button to submit the modification of Aging Time.
Select the range of entry number in the forwarding database to be
displayed.
No. From…To…
Query
Once you have selected the entry number, click on this button to get
most recent status of MAC addresses forwarding.
- 127 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.4.2 Forwarding Static
This option allows you to configure the static MAC address forwarding entries on a
specific bridge port. The setting of static MAC address takes effect on egress direction of
bridge port. From the Bridge menu, click on Forwarding and then Forwarding Static. The
following page is displayed.
Forwarding Static
Label
Description
Select the range of entry number in the FDB to be retrieved. Valid number
value: 1 ~ 512.
No. From…To…
Query
Delete
Click on this button to display the static MAC forwarding entries.
Delete the entries according to the entry number range you type in.
Click on these drop-down list to select a bridge port (ADSL bridge port or
GIGA bridge port) where the static forwarding entries to be configured.
Source MAC
VID
Type in the MAC address for the static entry.
Type in the VID for the static entry (1 ~ 4094).
Click on the drop-down list and select “Deny” or “Pass”.
"Pass" means to forward the packets with destination MAC address
matching one of the static forwarding MAC addresses to a specified output
bridge port.
Process
Create
"Deny" means to drop the packets.
Click on this button to create a new entry.
- 128 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.5 Relay
4.3.5.1 DSL Line Identify
This option allows you to configure the DHCP option and PPPoE relay function. From the
Bridge menu, click on Relay and then DSL Line Identify. The following page is displayed:
DSL Line Identify Setup
Label
Description
DSL Global Configuration
PPP Service Name
Type in the PPPoE service name to add.
Enable: the system will check whether the PPPoE service names from the
PPPoE server and client are the same. If not the same, the PPP connection
between server and client will not be established.
PPP
Check mode
Service
Name
Disable: the system will not check the PPPoE service name.
DSLAM Name
Type in name of the DSLAM when DSLAM Name mode is set to ‘Customer’.
- 129 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select the DSLAM name to be customer-defined or cluster name (Domain
name:NE name).
DSLAM Name mode:
DHCP Mode
Click on this drop-down list and select OFF/ON to disable/enable DHCP relay
function.
Click on this drop-down list and select the Relay Agent Information that is
inserted to the forwarding packets. Options are: Circuit ID, Remote ID, or Both.
ID Select
Click on this drop-down list and select the type of Circuit ID. Options are:
DEFAULT, CUSTOMER. DEFAULT means our system-defined default type
(<DSLAM name>:<circuit number>:<vpi>:<vci>); CUSTOMER means the
customer-defined type.
Circuit ID Type
Click on this drop-down list and select the format of Remote ID. Options are:
DEFAULT, Line ID (ADSL line identifier), Line Desc (description for the line),
Line Phone (phone number), CUSTOMER.
DEFAULT means our system default format, which is DSLAM
name:port_id/bridge_id. CUSTOMER means the customer-defined format;
customer can type in any word not exceeding 48 characters.
Remote ID Type
For Line ID, the format is port_id/bridge_id:Port Identifier.
For Line Desc, the format is port_id/bridge_id:Port Description.
For Line Phone, the format is port_id/bridge_id:Port Phone Number. The Port
Identifier, Description, and Phone Number are set in the ADSL line information
table (refer to section 4.4.3).
Once you have changed the setting of any one of the parameters (DHCP
Mode, ID Select, CKT Type, Remote Type, DLSAM Name, Service Name),
remember to click on Set to submit the modification.
Set
DSL Line ID Configuration
Click on these drop-down lists to select the bridge ports to be displayed (these
bridge ports must have been created in previous web page).
Query
Click on this button to display table.
Modify
Click on this button to submit the modification of DSL line identify table.
Bridge port index. Select the checkbox(s) corresponding to the circuit(s) of
which you want to modify the setting.
Select Port
Circuit ID
Type in the Circuit ID when CUSTOMER is selected for the CKT Type.
Type in the Remote ID when CUSTOMER is selected for the Remote Type.
Remote ID
Click on this drop-down list and specify the circuit to be trusted (TRUE), or
untrusted (FALSE; the relay agent will discard the DHCP packets from an
unstrusted circuit).
Trusted
- 130 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.6 IGMP
4.3.6.1 Protocol & Router Port
This option allows you to setup the IGMP protocol and router port. From the Bridge menu,
click on IGMP and then Protocol & Router Port. The following page is displayed:
IGMP Router Port Setup
Label
Description
Click on this button to modify the IGMP configuration once you have set new
values for the parameters.
Modify
Select the IGMP version. Options are: IGMP OFF, IGMP V1, IGMP V2, and
IGMP V3.
IGMP Version
IGMP Mode
Select the IGMP mode. Options are: Snooping and Proxy.
Disable or enable ACL mode. IGMP ACL profile (refer to section 4.3.6) will
be effective only when ACL mode is enabled.
IGMP ACL Mode
Enabled: the system will deny IGMP packets that have no router alert option
in their IP header.
Deny No Alert
Disabled: default value; the system will not care router alert option.
Enabled: the system will limit the maximum active counter of IGMP groups
can be joined (concurrently) for every bridge port.
Max Groups Limit
Disabled: the system will not limit the counter of IGMP groups can be joined
for the bridge port.
- 131 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Query Interval is the interval between General Queries sent by the
Querier. By varying this value, an administrator may tune the number of
IGMP messages on the network; larger values cause IGMP Queries to be
sent less often. Value range is 1 ~ 500. Default is 125 seconds.
Query 1~500(s)
The Unsolicited Report Interval is the time between repetitions of a host's
initial report of membership in a group. Value range is 1 ~ 500. Default: 1
second.
URI 1~500(s)
BC 1~500(s)
The Older Host Present Interval. It represents how long a host must wait
after hearing a Version 1 Query before it may send any IGMPv2 messages.
Default is 400 (sec).
The burstiness of IGMP traffic is inversely proportional to the Max Response
Time. A longer Max Response Time will spread Report messages over a
longer interval. However, a longer Max Response Time in Group-Specific
and Source-and-Group- Specific Queries extends the leave latency. (The
leave latency is the time between when the last member stops listening to a
source or group and when the traffic stops flowing.). Value range is 1 ~ 500.
Default is 10.
MRT 1~500(s)
The Last Member Query Interval is the Max Response Time used to calculate
the Max Resp Code inserted into Group- Specific Queries sent in response to
Leave Group messages. It is also the Max Response Time used in
calculating the Max Resp Code for Group-and-Source-Specific Query
messages. Value range is 1 ~ 500. Default is 1.
LMQT 1~500(s)
GMT 1~500(s)
Read-only value. The Group Membership Interval is the amount of time that
must pass before a multicast router decides there are no more members of a
group or a particular source on a network.
This value MUST be ((the Robustness Variable) times (the Query Interval))
plus (one Query Response Interval).
GIGA1
Click on this radio button to select GBE
Type in the VID you want to setup/delete the router port for.
Valid VID value is 1 ~ 4094.
Route Port VID
Type in IGMP router IP address. When working in IGMP proxy mode,
DSLAM will send IGMP general query whose source IP address is 0.0.0.0.
But PCs with Windows OS do not receive this kind of packets. So user can
assign an IP address here for proxy mode IGMP general query packet
reference.
Router IP
Create
Delete
Click on this button to create a new entry.
To delete an entry, select the checkbox of the entry and then click on Delete
button.
- 132 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.6.2 IGMP Profile
This option allows you to configure the IGMP ACL (Access Control List) profile. This
profile defines the IGMP multicast channels, which are allowed to join for each ADSL port.
That is, a multicast stream will be copied to an ADSL port only if that multicast stream is
registered in the ACL profile that is bound to this ADSL port. The maximum number of
IGMP multicast channels in an ACL profile is 256. Note that the same multicast channel
can be existed concurrently in two or more ACL profiles.
The ACL profile will be referred to only when ACL mode is enabled in the IGMP
Configuration page (refer to section 4.3.6). From the Bridge menu, click on IGMP and
then IGMP Profile. The following page is displayed:
IGMP Profile page = >
IGMP ACL Profile Configuration
Label
Description
Profile ID
Click on this drop-down list and specify the profile ID. Valid value is 01 ~ 48.
Click on this drop-down list and select the channel index range.
IP CHANNEL MAP
All select
Options are: Channel 001~032, Channel 033~064, …, Channel 225~256.
Click on this checkbox to select all channels in this page at one time. This is
convenient for quick value assignment.
- 133 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type the IGMP group IP address here for quick assignment. Click on Assign
button to put the value into the table. Then you can modify parts of the IP
addresses directly in the table.
Quickly IP Assign
Quickly VID Assign
Type the IGMP group IP address here for quick assignment. Click on Assign
button to put the value into the table.
Click on this button to apply the parameter values you have just entered. But
these values haven’t been really saved in the database. You must click on
Create to save the values. Once the setting has been saved, you cannot
modify the values. You must delete the channel and then create again.
Assign
Click on this checkbox to select the channel you want to create, delete, or
assign values.
Select
You can type the IGMP group address here and then click on Create button
to save. Valid values: 224.0.0.0 ~ 239.255.255.255. The range of addresses
from 224.0.0.0 to 224.0.0.255 is reserved for the use of routing protocols
and other low-level topology discovery or maintenance protocols.
IP Address
Query
Create
Delete
Click on this button to display current channels in the profile.
Click on this button to create new channels (IGMP group address).
Click on this button to delete channel(s) (IGMP group address).
Binding Profile page = >
IGMP ACL Profile Binding
Description
Label
Click on these drop-down lists to select a line bridge port.
- 134 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Click on this checkbox to select all ports in this page at one time.
This is convenient for quickly value assignment.
All select
This field is for quick value assignment (assign the same value to
all the ports in current page at one time). Type in the maximum
IGMP groups can be joined simultaneously per line port, and then
click on Assign to put the value into the table.
Quickly Max Group Assign
Quickly Profile ID Assign
Click on this drop-down list to select the profile ID you want to
bind. This is for quick value assignment.
Click on this drop-down list to select the binding action. This is for
quick value assignment.
Quickly Binding Assign
Assign
Options are: off -- unbind the profile, on -- bind the profile, reset --
rebind the profile.
Click on this button to apply the parameter values you have just
entered (or selected). But these values haven’t been really saved
in the database. You must click on Modify to save the values.
Modify
Port
Click on this button to submit the modification.
Click on the checkbox to select the port you want to modify or
assign values.
You can type in the maximum IGMP groups can be joined
simultaneously to limit the concurrent multicast channels for a
bridge port. This value is effective only when the limit maximum
IGMP groups function is enabled (refer to section 4.3.6).
Max Groups
Profile ID
You can select the profile ID you want to bind here.
You can select the binding action here.
Binding Status
- 135 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.6.3 IGMP Multicast
This option allows you to query the IGMP multicast status. From the Bridge menu, click
on IGMP and then IGMP Multicast. The IGMP Group page is displayed. Click on the
IGMP Type drop- down list and select Group or Source.
IGMP Type > Group: Click on List by drop-down list to select listing by entry number or
listing by VID & IGMP group IP.
List by Number:
IGMP Group – List by Number
Label
Description
No. From…To…
Type in the entry number range in the table.
Query
Click on this button to display the table entries.
List by VID & Group IP:
IGMP Group – List by VID & Group IP
Description
Label
VID
Type in the VLAN ID (1~ 4094).
Group IP
Query
Type in the IGMP group IP address.
Click on this button to display the table entries.
- 136 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IGMP Type > Source: This option allows you to query the Source IP, which is the IP
address of the source that is joining a multicast group on an interface. This option is
available only when IGMP version 3 is selected for the system’s IGMP configuration
(refer to section 4.3.6).
IGMP Source
Label
Description
Type in the VLAN ID (1~ 4094).
VID
Group IP
Type in the IGMP group IP address.
No. From…To…
Query
Type in the entry number range in the table.
Click on this button to display the table entries.
- 137 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.7 IPOA
4.3.7.1 BRAS MAC
The IDL-2402 supports an IPOA/IPOE IWF (Interworking Function). This option allows
you to setup the BRAS MAC address that is used by the IPOA/IPOE IWF. From the
Bridge menu, click on IPOA and then BRAS MAC. The following page is displayed.
To add/modify a MAC:
Select a checkbox beside an index and type in BRAS MAC address, and then click on
Modify button.
To delete a MAC:
Select a checkbox (checkboxes) beside the index and then click on Delete button.
- 138 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.3.7.2 Interface Setup
This option allows you to setup the interface for IPoA/IPoE IWF. From the Bridge menu,
click on IPOA and then Interface Setup. The following page is displayed.
Click on the radio button to select a circuit, set values for the parameters, and then click
on Modify button.
IPoA Interface Setup
Label
Description
Click on the drop-down list and select the line ports to be listed.
VPI
VCI
Type in the VPI. Value range is 0 ~ 255.
Type in the VCI. Value range is 21, 32 ~ 65535.
Type in the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by
the bridge port (for GBE interface: 1 ~ 4096, for DSL interface: 1 ~ 128).
MaxMAC
CVID
Type in the VID value of C-Tag (the innermost VLAN tag as defined in
IEEE 802.1ad and having an EtherType value of 0x8100). The C-VID
indicates the access loop.
Click on the drop-down list and select the VLAN priority level of C-Tag
(Pri-0 ~ 7).
CVPRI
- 139 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Click on the drop-down lists and select a traffic type for transmit and
receive direction respectively. Available options are created in the ATM
Traffic Descriptor page. See section 4.5.1.
Traffic (Rx/Tx)
BRAS
Click on the drop-down list and select a BRAS MAC. Available options
are created in the IPoA BRAS MAC page. See section 4.3.7.
Uplink
Encap
Status
Modify
Query
Click on the drop-down list and select the uplink interface.
Select AAL5 Encapsulation Type: VCMUX/LLC
Enable/Disable IPoA IWF.
Click on this button to submit the modification.
Click on this button to query most recent data.
- 140 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4 ADSL
4.4.1 Profile
4.4.1.1 Service Main Profile
This option allows you to configure the ADSL line service profile. From the ADSL menu,
click on Profile and then Service Profile(main). The following page is displayed.
ADSL Line Service Profile setup
Label
Description
Click on the drop-down list and select the range of profile index. Options
are: 0~10, 11~20, …, 111~120.
Select Index
This field shows the profile index. Click on the radio button beside the
profile index to select the profile you want to modify or delete. Note that
profile 1 (default) cannot be modified or deleted.
Index
Name
Type in the name of the profile.
- 141 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Click on the drop-down list and select the Downstream Rate Adaptive
Mode. Valid options are:
Manual – Rate changed manually
Rate Mode Downstream
Init – Rate automatically selected at start up only and does not change
after that
Dynamic – Rate automatically selected at initialization and is
continuously adapted during operation (show time).
Click on the drop-down list and select the Upstream Rate Adaptive
Mode. Valid options are:
Manual – Rate changed manually
Rate Mode Upstream
Init – Rate automatically selected at start up only and does not change
after that
Dynamic - Rate automatically selected at initialization and is
continuously adapted during operation (show time).
- 142 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.1.2 Service Channel Profile
This option allows you to configure the ADSL service channel profile. From the ADSL
menu, click on Profile and then Service Profile(Channel). The following page is displayed.
ADSL Service Channel Profile setup
Label
Description
Click on the drop-down list and select the range of profile index. Options
are: 1~5, 6~10, …, 116~120.
Select Index
Index
This field shows the profile index. Click on the radio button beside the
profile index to select the profile you want to modify.
Note that profile 1 (default) cannot be modified.
This is a threshold value that is the minimum packet size before the
system leaving the L2 low power state. Valid value is 0~32.
L2 Packet
Direction
DS: downstream. US: upstream.
Min: Minimum bit rate during show time
Planned: Planned bit rate during setup
Max: Maximum bit rate during show time
L2 Min: Minimum bit rate during L2 low power state
BitRate
DownShift Noise Margin (dB)/ Decrease net data rate if Noise Margin is below the Downshift Noise
- 143 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Min Interval (sec)
Margin for DownShift Min Interval.
UpShift Noise Margin (dB)/Min Increase net data rate if Noise Margin is above the Upshift Noise Margin
Interval (sec)
for Upshift Min Interval.
Interleaving MaxDelay
IMP 0~8 (symbols)
Maximum interleaving delay (1~63 ms)
Minimum impulse noise protection (0.0~8.0 dB)
- 144 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.1.3 Spectrum Main Profile
This option allows you to configure the ADSL spectrum profile. From the ADSL menu,
click on Profile and then Spectrum Profile(main). The following page is displayed.
ADSL Spectrum Profile setup
Label
Description
Click on the drop-down list and select the range of profile index.
Select Index
Options are: 1~4, 5~8, …, 117~120.
This field shows the profile index. Click on the radio button beside the profile index
to select the profile you want to modify or delete.
Index
Note that profile 1 (default) cannot be modified or deleted.
Type in the name of the profile.
Name
Click on the radio button to select allowed power management mode. Options are
Disable (only L0 state allowed), L2 (L0 and L2 states allowed), L2L3 (L0, L2, and L3
states allowed).
Power Mode
Type in the minimum time (in seconds) between Exit from L2 low power state and
the next Entry into the L2 low power state. Value range is 0 ~ 255.
L0 Time
Type in the minimum time (in seconds) between an Entry into L2 low power state
and the first L2 low power trim request, and between two consecutive L2 power trim
requests. Value range is 0 ~ 255.
L2 Time
L2 ATPR
Type in the maximum aggregate transmit power reduction (in dB) that is allowed at
- 145 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
transition of L0 to L2 state or an L2 low power trim request. Value range is 0 ~ the
value of L2 ATPRT (dB).
Type in the total maximum aggregate transmit power reduction (in dB) that is
allowed in the L2 state; the total reduction is the sum of all reductions of L2 Request
(i.e., at transition of L0 to L2 state) and L2 power trims. Value range is 0 ~ 15 (dB).
L2 ATPRT
Direction
Message
DS: downstream. US: upstream.
Type in the minimum rate of the message-based overhead that shall be maintained
by the ATU in upstream/downstream direction. Value range is 4 ~ 28k bit/s.
Type in the Noise Margin values.
Min: Minimum noise margin (0.0~31.0,51.1db, default 0.0)
Tar: Target noise margin (0.0~31.0,51.1db, default 6.0)
Max: Maximum noise margin (0.0~31.0,51.1db, default 51.1)
Click on this button to submit the modification
Click on this button to delete a profile
Noise Margin
Modify
Delete
Query
Click on this button to display the profiles.
Click on this button to view/modify allowed ADSL modes of operation for the profile.
The following page is displayed.
An OP Mode is supported if the check box is selected.
Modify Status:
Complete – modems will re-train after you click on Apply button
OP Mode-N
(To be continued)
- 146 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Click on this button to view/modify the current downstream/upstream Carrier Mask
parameters. Input Carrier bit value and then click Apply.
Modify Status:
Complete – modems will re-train after you click on Apply button
Carrier Mask-N
(To be continued)
- 147 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Click on this button to view/modify Radio Frequency Interference (RFI) Bands data.
Input the Start/Stop frequency, select the Ingress Level, Egress Control, Signal Type,
and then click on the Apply button.
Modify Status:
Complete – modems will re-train after you click on Apply button
RFI-N
- 148 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.1.4 Spectrum ADSLx Profile
This option allows you to configure the ADSL2/2+/READSL spectrum profile. From the
ADSL menu, click on Profile and then Spectrum Profile(ADSLx). The following page is
displayed.
ADSL2/ReADSL/ADSL2+ Spectrum Profile
Label
Select Index
Description
Click on the drop-down list to select the range of profile index. Options
are: 1~4, 5~8, …, 117~120.
Index
This field shows the profile index.
Select ADSL2/ReADSL2/ADSL2+ and Enable/Disable special modem
functions for better performance.
Modem Features
Direction
DS: downstream. US: upstream
Aggregate Power
Maximum nominal aggregate transmit power (0~25.5dB)
Maximum PSD level. Valid values are:
ADSL2: -60 ~ -40 dB/Hz DS, -60 ~ -38 dB/Hz US
ReADSL2: -60 ~ -37 dB/Hz DS, -60 ~ -32.9 dB/Hz US
ADSL2+: -60 ~ -40 dB/Hz DS, -60 ~ -38 dB/Hz US
PSD Level
- 149 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Only for ADSL2+. Valid options are:
Standard/CA100/CA110/CA120/CA130/CA140/CA150/
CA160CA170/CA180/CA190/CA200/CA210/CA220/CA230/
CA240/CA250/CA260/CA270/CA280
PSD Shape
PBO
Power backoff operation mode (OFF/ON).
Maximum aggregate receive power over a set of subcarriers. It ranges
from –25.5 to +25.5 dBm, with 0.1 dB steps.
Max Rx Aggr. Allowed PWR
- 150 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.1.5 TCA Profile
This option allows you to setup the PM counter threshold for TCA (threshold crossing
alert). From the ADSL menu, click on Profile and then TCA Profile. The following page is
displayed.
ADSL TCA Threshold setup
Label
Description
Click on this drop-down list to select the page to be displayed.
Once you have typed in new threshold values, click on this button to submit the
modification.
Modify
Delete
Select
Click on this button to delete a selected profile (or profiles).
Click on the checkbox to select the profile you want to modify or delete.
To issue TCA when the PM statistics exceed thresholds, this profile must be
enabled.
Enable
int/day ESs-NE/FE
int/day SESs-NE/FE
int/day UASs-NE/FE
int LOS-NE/FE
Interval/Day Errored Seconds – near end/far end
Interval/Day Severely Errored Seconds – near end/far end
Interval/Day Unavailable Seconds – near end/far end
Interval Loss of Signal – near end/far end
int LOF-NE/FE
Interval Loss of Frame – near end/far end
int LOPWR-FE
Interval Loss of Power – far end
- 151 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
int LOL-NE
Interval Loss of Link – near end
int ErrFrm-NE/FE
Interval Error Frame – near end/far end
- 152 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.2 Data & Inventory
4.4.2.1 Inventory
This option allows you to view the inventory of the ATUC and ATUR. From the ADSL
menu, click on Data & Inventory and then Inventory. The following page is displayed.
ADSL Inventory
Label
Description
Click on this drop-down list and select the ports to be displayed.
Atux
Select ATUC or ATUR inventory to be displayed.
To view inventory, click on this button once you have selected the port and
ATUx.
Query
- 153 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.2.2 Loop Test
This option allows you to do the ADSL Dual End Loop Test. From the ADSL menu, click
on Data & Inventory and then Loop Test. The following page is displayed.
Click on the drop-down list and select the line port you want to test. Then click on
Diagnostics Run to start a DELT. If you want to discontinue the test or make the loop go
back to the normal state when the test has finished, just click on Diagnostics Abort.
Test in progress: Click on Diagnostics Run and then the following page is displayed.
- 154 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Test completed: When the test has completed successfully, test result is displayed as
follows.
- 155 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- 156 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- 157 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.2.3 Carrier Data
This option allows you to view the ADSL line carrier data. From the ADSL menu, click on
Data & Inventory and then Carrier Data. The following page is displayed.
Select the line port (1 ~ 24) and carrier type (LOAD or GAIN). Then click on Query button.
Note that if the line port is still in loop testing status, you cannot query the carrier data.
- 158 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
- 159 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.2.4 OP Data
This option allows you to view the ADSL line/channel operational data and carrier data.
From the ADSL menu, click on Data & Inventory and then OP Data. The following page is
displayed.
Line Operational Data: Click on ADSL OP Data drop-down list and select the item Line
(OP). Then select the line port (1 ~ 24). Click on Query button.
- 160 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Channel Operational Data: Click on ADSL OP Data drop-down list and select the item
Channel (OP). Then select the port (1~24). Click on Query button. The following page is
displayed.
- 161 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.3 Line Config & Info
4.4.3.1 Line Configuration
This option allows you to setup the ADSL line configuration. From the ADSL menu, click
on Line Config & Info and then Line Configuration. The following page is displayed.
ADSL Line Configuration
Label
Description
ADSL Port From…To…
Type in the line port range. Valid number: 1 ~ 24.
Select the Operational Mode(s) to be masked. Select the modes in
the block by using mouse and Shift or Ctrl key. Select the check box
and then click on Modify button.
Operational Mask Mode
Click on this drop-down list and select the carrier data mode.
Select the check box and then click on Modify button.
OFF - Carrier data won’t vary during show time.
Carrier Data Mode
ON - Carrier data collection is active. The carrier data will be
refreshed during show time.
ON INIT - The ADSL facility is re-initialized and carrier data collection
is active (will be refreshed).
- 162 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Click on this drop-down list and select ON to force the ADSL port to
enter power management L3 mode (Idle state).
FORCE L3 Mode
Select the check box and then click on Modify button.
Click on this button to submit modification.
Modify
Query
Click on this button to display current line configuration.
- 163 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.4.3.2 Line Information
This option allows you to setup the ADSL line information. From the ADSL menu, click on
Line Config & Info and then Line Information. The following page is displayed.
ADSL Line Information
Label
Description
ADSL Port From…To…
Type in the line port range. Valid number: 1~24.
Click on this button to submit the modification once you have entered new
value for the ADSL line information. Note that to modify an entry, you must
select the checkbox on the leftmost column before you click on Modify.
Modify
Query
Once you have typed in the port number range, click on this button to
display line information of these ports.
Identifier
Type in the ADSL line identifier. Up to 63 characters is allowed.
Type in the phone number. Up to 63 characters is allowed.
Type in any comment of this line. Up to 63 characters is allowed.
Phone No
Description
- 164 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.5 Traffic
4.5.1 ATM Traffic Descriptor
This option allows you to modify the traffic table. From the Traffic menu, click on ATM
Traffic Descriptor. The following page is displayed:
ATM Traffic Descriptor Setup
Label
Description
PCR
CDVT
SCR
MBS
PCR stands for Peak Cell Rate (cells/second).
CDVT stands for Cell Delay Variation Tolerance (microseconds).
SCR stands for Sustained Cell Rate (cells/second).
MBS stands for Maximum Burst Size (cells).
This field will show Shaped or Policed depending on the descriptor type you
select.
TYPE
Click on this drop-down list and select a descriptor type. After you select a
descriptor type, the corresponding parameters (which are configurable) will
be displayed on the top. Valid descriptor types are:
[Unshaped] atmNoTrafficDescriptor:
This identifies no ATM traffic descriptor type. This traffic descriptor type can
be used for best effort traffic.
Descriptor
[Policed CBR] atmCLPTransparentNoScr /
[Shaped CBR] atmCLPTransparentNoScr:
This traffic descriptor type is for the CLP- transparent model and no
Sustained Cell Rate. This traffic descriptor type is applicable to
connections following the CBR.1 conformance definition. Connections
specifying this traffic descriptor type will be rejected at UNI 3.0 or UNI 3.1
- 165 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
interfaces. For a similar traffic descriptor type that can be accepted at UNI
3.0 and UNI 3.1 interfaces, see "atmNoClpNoScr".
[Policed VBR1] atmNoCLPScrCdvt:
This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP with Sustained Cell Rate and CDVT.
This traffic descriptor type is applicable to VBR connections following the
UNI 3.0/3.1 conformance definition for PCR CLP=0+1 and SCR CLP=0+1.
These VBR connections differ from VBR.1 connections in that the CLR
objective applies only to the CLP=0 cell flow.
[Policed VBR2] atmCLPNoTaggingScrCdvt /
[Shaped VBRNRT] atmCLPNoTaggingScrCdvt:
This traffic descriptor type is for CLP with Sustained Cell Rate and CDVT
and no tagging. This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections
following the VBR.2 conformance definition.
[Policed VBR3] atmCLPTaggingScrCdvt:
This traffic descriptor type is for CLP with tagging and Sustained Cell Rate
and CDVT. This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following
the VBR.3 conformance definition.
[Policed UBR1] atmNoCLPNoScrCdvt:
This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP with CDVT and no Sustained Cell
Rate. This traffic descriptor type is applicable to
CBR connections following the UNI 3.0/3.1 conformance definition for PCR
CLP=0+1. These CBR connections differ from CBR.1 connections in that
the CLR objective applies only to the CLP=0 cell flow. This traffic descriptor
type is also applicable to connections following the UBR.1 conformance
definition.
[Policed UBR2] atmNoCLPTaggingNoScr:
This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP with tagging and no Sustained Cell
Rate. This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following the
UBR.2 conformance definition.
[Shaped UBR] atmNoCLPNoScr:
This traffic descriptor type is for no CLP and no Sustained Cell Rate
[Shaped VBR] atmCLPTransparent:
This traffic descriptor type is for the CLP- transparent model with Sustained
Cell Rate. This traffic descriptor type is applicable to connections following
the VBR.1 conformance definition. Connections specifying this traffic
descriptor type will be rejected at UNI 3.0 or UNI 3.1 interfaces. For a
similar traffic descriptor type that can be accepted at UNI 3.0 and UNI 3.1
interfaces, see "atmNoClpScr".
- 166 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Create
Delete
Click on this button to create a new traffic descriptor.
When you want to delete a traffic descriptor, click on the radio button beside
the row number to select the traffic descriptor and then click on the Delete
button. Note that the default profile cannot be deleted.
- 167 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6 SNMP
4.6.1 SNMP Community
This option allows you to configure the SNMP community that is the group that IDL-2402s
and management stations running SNMP belong to. It helps define where information is
sent. The community name is used to identify the group and serve as form of
authentication. From the SNMP menu, click on SNMP Community. The following page is
displayed.
SNMP Community Setup
Label
Description
Click on this button to create a new SNMP community. After you click on New, the
following page is displayed. Type in the name of the SNMP community (up to 63
characters; note that community names beginning with a digital number are not allowed)
and select the access mode (Read only or Read/Write). Then click on Apply button.
New
Access Mode Select the SNMP community access mode: Read only or Read/Write.
Modify
Delete
Click on this button to modify the community name.
Select an index and then click on this button to delete a community.
- 168 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6.2 SNMP Target
This option allows you to configure the SNMP target to control where the SNMP traps
(notifications) are sent. Traps are used to report an alarm or other asynchronous event
about a managed IDL-2402 system. From the SNMP menu, click on SNMP Target. The
following page is displayed.
SNMP Community Setup
Label
Description
Click on this button to create a new SNMP target. After you click on New, the following page is
displayed. Type in the IP Address, Name and Tag of the SNMP target, Address Port (Usually
SNMP uses UDP port 161 for general SNMP messages and UDP port 162 for SNMP trap
messages), and select Trap Version (V1 or V2c). Then click on Apply button. The Target Tag can
be the same with a Notify Tag; you can select the Notify Tag in the Use Notify Tag field. The
Notify Tag is created in the SNMP Notify table (see next section). When the Target Tag is the
same with a Notify Tag, the SNMP notification with that Notify Tag is sent to the Target with the
same tag.
New
- 169 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Target
No.
Click on this drop-down list and select the SNMP target number.
Query Select the target number and then click on this button to retrieve the information.
Delete Select the target number and then click on this button to delete a target.
Modify Select the target number and then click on this button to modify the target setting.
- 170 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6.3 SNMP Notify
This option allows you to setup the SNMP Notification (In SNMPv1, asynchronous event
reports are called traps while they are called notifications in later versions of SNMP).
From the SNMP menu, click on SNMP Notify. The following page is displayed.
Table 0-2
SNMP Community Setup
Description
Label
Notify No.
This field shows the Notify number you select.
Click on this button to create a new SNMP Notify. After you click on New, the following
page is displayed. Type in the name and tag of the SNMP Notify and click on Apply
button.
By specifying the Notify tag, you can bind the Notify name to the SNMP target
address table. When the Notify tag is the same with the Target Tag in a SNMP target
table (refer to previous section), the notification is sent to the corresponding Target
address.
New
Delete
Modify
Select a row and then click on this button to delete a Notify.
Select the row and type in new notify tag and then click on this button to submit the
modification.
- 171 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7 Maintenance
4.7.1 SYS Log Server
This option allows you to configure the IP address of the SYS Log server which listens for
incoming Syslog messages. From the Maintenance menu, click on SYS Log Server. The
following page is displayed.
SYS Log Server Setup
Label
Description
Current Server IP
This field shows the IP address of current Sys Log server.
Type in the new IP address of Sys Log server. The server must be a
remote host.
Change Server Address
Modify
To change SYS Log server address, click on this button once you have
type in a new server IP address.
Click on this drop-down list and select Start to start sending the Syslog
messages to the server or Stop to stop sending the Syslog messages to
the server.
Action
- 172 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.2 Database
This option allows you to import/export the configuration data. From the Maintenance
menu, click on Database. The following page is displayed. Select the database
configuration action you want to perform.
DB Configuration Concept:
- 173 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(A)
Import File (Write Download Config To Flash):
Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download.
Then click on Get File button.
Write downloaded Config to Flash in progress:
Write to memory successfully:
Fail to Get File:
- 174 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B)
Import File (Load Remote Config to Running Config)
Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to download.
Then click on Get File button.
Load to Running Config successfully:
Fail to Get File:
- 175 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(C)
Export File (Put Running Config to Remote TFTP Server)
Type in the TFTP Server IP address and the name of the file you want to export.
Then click on Put File button.
TFTP put file successfully:
TFTP put file fail:
- 176 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(D)
Save Running Config to Flash (System Config)
Click on the drop-down list and select partition, and then click on Write_Running
button to write running configuration to Flash.
Write running config to Flash successfully:
(E)
Reload Flash to Running Config
Click on the drop-down list and select partition, and then click on LOAD_FLASH
button to load configuration from Flash to Running Config.
Load configuration from Flash to Running Config successfully:
- 177 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(F)
Restore Factory Default
Click on Factory_Default button to restore factory default configuration.
After loading default configuration to Flash successfully, you must click on RESTART
button to restart the system so that the configuration can take effect.
- 178 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G)
Flash Boot Point Configuration Select
Click on the Boot Config drop-down list and select the partition (Partition1 or Partition2)
as the boot point. Click on Apply button and then restart the system. The system will
restart and load the configuration in the partition you select into the running configuration.
- 179 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.3 Firmware Update
This option allows you to ftp get the firmware from a server and write to flash for updating
the system firmware. From the Maintenance menu, click on Firmware Update. The
following page is displayed.
Firmware Update
Label
Description
Once you have typed in the parameter values, click on this button to start
firmware update.
Firmware Update
Remote FTP Server IP
Server User Name
Server Password
File Name
Type in the IP address of the FTP server.
Type in the ftp user name.
Type in the ftp password.
Type in the firmware filename.
Firmware Update Status
This field shows current status of firmware update process.
Select firmware memory partition (Partition 1 or 2). If you change to the
other partition (not current partition), the system will restart immediately.
Firmware Partition Select
- 180 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
This section displays the partition information including firmware version,
updating date, and status (active or not). Note that active partition means the
partition for next power-up, not current partition in use. You can refer to
Current Version to know which partition is the current partition in use. When
you update the firmware, new firmware will be written to the partition that is
not currently in use.
Partition Information
FTP Get in progress:
The following message is displayed during getting file from FTP server.
Firmware Write in progress:
The Flash Write process may take a few minutes; you must not turn off or reset the
system during the process.
- 181 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Firmware Write successfully:
When the Flash Write process has completed successfully, the Firmware Update Status
shows “Firmware has upgraded already”. You can now restart the system.
- 182 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.4 ATM Loopbacks
This option allows you to modify the ATM F4/F5 entries or send the diagnostic entry.
From the Maintenance menu, click on ATM Loopbacks. The following page is displayed:
ATM Loopbacks Setup
Label
Description
Click on the radio button to Disable/Enable OAM Cell Generation. Then
click on Apply button to submit the setting.
OAM Cell Generation
Click on the drop-down lists to select port range and PVC (1 ~ 8).
Click on this button to create a loopback setting.
Create
Note: make sure the interface has been setup and the service state of the
circuit is turned on.
Query
Delete
Click on this button to query the loopback status.
Click on this button to delete a loopback entry.
Click on the checkbox to select the PVC you want to create or delete the
loopback setting for.
Select
Port
This field shows the line port and PVC number.
Type in a loopback ID (32 digit).
LoopBack ID
Test Type
Select the loopback type: F5 E2E or F5 Segment.
This field shows current loopback testing status. Possible values are:
Fail, Success, In Progress, or ----.
Status
- 183 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.5 Fault Management
4.7.5.1 Alarm/Event
This option allows you to query current alarm, history alarm, and event log. From the
Maintenance menu, click on Fault Management and then Alarm/Event. The Current
Alarm page is displayed. Click on the Alarm/Event Select drop-down list and select
Current Alarm, History Alarm, or Event Log to view.
Current Alarm:
Type in the range of rows (1 ~ 1024) and then click on the Query button.
Current Alarm Table
Label
Description
Click on this button to get most recent data.
This field shows the row number.
Query
Row
ID
This field shows the alarm ID.
Description
This field shows the description for the alarm.
This field shows the alarm level. Valid values are:
MJ: major alarm. MN: minor alarm.
This field shows the alarm state: Set or Clear.
Sequential number.
Level
State
Sequential
Time
Alarm occurring date and time.
- 184 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
History Alarm:
History Alarm Table
Label
Description
Query
Click on this button to query history alarms.
Click on this button to clear the alarm history table.
This field shows the row number.
Clear History
Row
ID
This field shows the alarm ID.
Description
This field shows the description for the alarm.
This field shows the alarm level. Valid values are:
MJ: major alarm. MN: minor alarm.
This field shows the alarm state: Set or Clear.
Sequential number.
Level
State
Sequential
Time
Alarm occurring date and time.
- 185 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Log:
Type in the range of rows and then click on the Query button.
Event Log
Label
Description
Query
Click on this button to query most recent event log.
Click on this button to clear the event log.
This field shows the row number.
This field shows the event ID.
Clear Event
Row
ID
Description
Sequential
Time
This field shows the description for the event.
Sequential number.
Event occurring date and time.
- 186 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.5.2 Alarm Profile
This option allows you to view and update the alarm profiles. From the Maintenance
menu, click on Fault Management and then Alarm profile. The Alarm Profile page is
displayed. Click on the Select Page drop-down list and select a page to display.
To modify an alarm profile, click on the radio button beside the alarm ID, select the Level
(Major/Minor), Mask/Unmask, and then click on the Modify button. You can also select
the ALL ID checkbox to modify all alarm types at a time.
- 187 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.5.3 Hardware Temperature
This page allows you to:
„
„
view current system temperature
set several temperature and time thresholds (see description in the following table)
From the Maintenance menu, click on Fault Management and then Hardware Temp. The
following page is displayed:
Temperature Configuration
Label
Description
Click on this button to submit the update once you have entered all
the new threshold values.
Modify
Current Temperature (oC)
Up Shift Threshold (oC)
Up Shift Time (Sec)
This field shows the current system temperature.
The system will produce notification (alarm) when the monitored
system temperature is higher than Up Shift Threshold (-55~85 oC) for
over Up Shift Time (1~255 sec).
Refer to the description for Up Shift Threshold.
The system will produce notification (alarm) when the monitored
system temperature is lower than Down Shift Threshold (-55~85 oC)
for over Down Shift Time (1~255 sec).
Down Shift Threshold (oC)
Down Shift Time (Sec)
Fan ON Threshold (oC)
Fan Shift Time (Sec)
Refer to the description for Down Shift Threshold.
FAN Enable temperature threshold (-40~15 oC). When the system
temperature is higher than the threshold, the fan will be turned on
automatically.
This field shows the elapsed time since the FAN was turned on.
- 188 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.6 Performance Monitoring
4.7.6.1 System Utilization
This option allows you to monitor the memory utilization and network processor utilization.
From the Maintenance menu, click on Performance Monitoring and then System
Utilization. The following page is displayed.
- 189 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.6.2 Ethernet Statistics
This option allows you to view the Gigabit Ethernet counter values for the trunk or line
interface. From the Maintenance menu, click on Performance Monitoring and then
Ethernet Statistics. Click on the leftmost drop-down list to select interface (giga port or
DSL line port); if line interface is selected, you must further click on the middle and
rightmost drop-down list to select the line port number and PVC number. At last, click on
Query to get data of that interface.
GBE interface:
- 190 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADSL line PVC:
- 191 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.6.3 ATM Statistics
This option allows you to query the ATM Statistics. From the Maintenance menu, click on
Performance Monitoring and then ATM Statistics. The following page is displayed.
Query ATM Statistics
Label
ADSL Port
Description
Click on this button to select line port.
Auto Update
Show
Click on this checkbox to auto update the displayed statistics.
Click on this drop-down list to select Tx, Rx, or All (Tx & Rx) data.
Click on this button to query current statistics.
Query
- 192 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.7.6.4 RMON
This option allows you to configure and query the RMON Statistics. The IDL-2402
supports performance statistics defined in RMON MIB groups 1 (Ethernet statistics), 2
(history control), 3 (alarm), and 9 (event) per RFC 2819 for all network uplink ports. From
the Maintenance menu, click on Performance Monitoring and then RMON. The following
page is displayed. Select type of RMON table in the drop-down list.
- 193 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
‹ ETH Statistics
This option is for displaying the Ethernet interface RMON data. Click on the Data Source
drop-down list and select GBE1. Type in an owner name and then click on New button to
create a new ETH statistics entry. An owner is the entity that configured this entry and is
therefore using the resources assigned to it.
To modify an entry in this table, click on the index to select the entry, type in new value,
and then click on Modify. To delete an entry, click on the index to select the entry and
then click on Delete.
- 194 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following parameters are monitored in this table:
RMON ETH Statistics variables
Variable
Description
Rx DropEvents
Monitoring rx dropped packets
Monitoring rx bytes packets
Monitoring rx packets
Rx Bytes
Rx Packet
Rx BroadcastPkts
Rx MulticastPkts
Rx CRC Align Errors
Rx Undersize Pkts
Rx Oversize Pkts
Rx Fragments
Monitoring rx broadcast packets
Monitoring rx multicast packets
Monitoring rx error aligment packets
Monitoring rx undersize packets
Monitoring rx oversize packets
Monitoring rx fragments packets
Monitoring rx jabber packets
Monitoring tx single collision packets
Monitoring tx/rx 64 bytes
Rx Jabbers
Tx Collisions
Tx/Rx Pkts 64bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 65~127bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 128~255bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 256~511bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 512~1023bytes
Tx/Rx Pkts 1024~1518bytes
Tx Bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 65 to 127 bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 128 to 255 bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 256 to 511 bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 512 to 1023 bytes
Monitoring tx/rx 1024 to 1518 bytes
Monitoring tx bytes packets
Monitoring tx packets
Tx Packet
Tx MulticastPkts
Tx BroadcastPkts
Monitoring tx multicast packets
Monitoring tx broadcast packets
- 195 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
‹ History Control
This table is for controlling the ETH History table (see next section). History Control 1 is
for controlling ETH History table 1; History Control 2 is for controlling ETH History table 2;
etc. Type in the Requested value and Interval (sec) and then click on New to create a
History Control entry. Up to 10 History Control entries can be created. To modify an entry,
click on the index to select the entry, type in new value, and then click on Modify. To
delete an entry, click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete.
RMON History Control Table
Label
Data Source
Description
Data source identifies the source of the data for which historical data was
collected and placed in a table on behalf of this HistoryControl entry. Here the
source is GBE1 interface.
Owner
An owner is the entity that configured this entry and is therefore using the
resources assigned to it.
Requested
Requested value is the requested number of intervals over which data is to be
saved in the part of the media-specific table associated with this
HistoryControl entry.
Granted
Interval
The number of sampling intervals over which data shall be saved in the part of
the media-specific table associated with thisHistoryControl entry.
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled for each bucket in the
part of the media-specific table associated with this
HistoryControl entry. The value range is 1 to 3600 (sec).
- 196 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
‹ ETH History
This option is for displaying Ethernet interface RMON history data. Before a history table
is available, you have to create a History Control entry in advance (see previous section).
To query the History table, click on the History Index drop-down list and select a history
table and then click on Query.
RMON ETH History Table
Label
Description
HistIndex
This field shows the History Table index. The history identified by this
index is the same history as identified by the same value of History Control
index.
SampleIndex
IntervalStart
The Sample index uniquely identifies the particular Sample among all
samples associated with the same History Control entry.
The value of System Up Time* at the start of the interval over which this
sample was measured.
*System Up Time is the time since the network management portion of the system
was last re-initialized.
- 197 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RMON ETH History variables
Description
Variable
Rx DropEvents
Rx Bytes
Monitoring Rx dropped packets
Monitoring Rx bytes packets
Monitoring Rx packets
Rx Packets
Rx Broadcast Pkts
Rx Multicast Pkts
Rx CRC Align Errors
Rx Undersize Pkts
Rx Oversize Pkts
Rx Fragments
Rx Jabbers
Monitoring Rx broadcast packets
Monitoring Rx multicast packets
Monitoring Rx error alignment packets
Monitoring Rx undersize packets
Monitoring Rx oversize packets
Monitoring Rx fragments packets
Monitoring Rx jabber packets
Monitoring Tx single collision packets
Monitoring Tx bytes
Tx Collisions
Tx Bytes
Tx Packets
Monitoring Tx packets
Tx Multicast
Monitoring Tx multicast
Tx Broadcast
Utilization
Monitoring Tx broadcast
Monitoring Tx Utilization
- 198 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
‹ Alarm
This option allows you to configure the RMON alarm setting. This table controls the
conditions on which alarms occur. Click on New to create an entry. To modify an entry,
click on the index to select the entry, type in new value, and then click on Modify. To
delete an entry, click on the index to select the entry and then click on Delete.
RMON Alarm setup
Label
Description
The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the
rising and falling thresholds. Value range: 0~2147483647 (0: disable).
Interval
Owner
RMON alarm owner (max 31 characters).
Click on the drop-down list to select ETH statistics variable and index of ETH
Statistics table entries.
OID Variable
RMON alarm sample type includes:
ABSOLUTE: the value of the selected variable will be compared directly with the
thresholds at the end of the sampling interval.
SampleType
DELTA: the value of the selected variable at the last sample will be subtracted
from the current value, and the difference compared with the
thresholds.
- 199 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Set the alarm type that may be sent. Options are Rising, Falling, and Both.
Rising or Both: If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is greater than or
equal to the Rising Threshold, then a single rising alarm will be
generated.
StartupAlarm
Falling or Both: If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is less than or
equal to the Falling Threshold, then a single falling alarm will be
generated.
Value
This field shows the value of the monitored data.
RMON alarm rising threshold (0~4294967295).
RMON alarm falling threshold (0~4294967295).
Rising Threshold
Falling Threshold
This index is used when a rising threshold is crossed. You must refer to the
index of RMON Event table. If there is no corresponding entry in the Event table,
then no association exists.
Rising Event Index
Falling Event Index
This index is used when a falling threshold is crossed. You must refer to the
index of RMON Event table. If there is no corresponding entry in the Event table,
then no association exists.
Following figure shows an example of RMON alarm for ABSOLUTE sample type. As
shown in the figure, the counting value keeps increasing. But when the value overflows,
the system will count from zero again. The sample in T2 is the first one crossing the
Rising Threshold, so an alarm occurs. No alarms will be generated afterwards unless the
counting value overflows and count from zero again (the sample in T10 causes an alarm
again).
- 200 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Another figure shows the example of RMON alarm for DELTA sample type. As shown in
the following figure, the delta value varies high and low. The sample in T1 is the first one
crossing the Rising Threshold, so an alarm occurs. No alarms will be generated
afterwards until T5 sample which is crossing the Falling Threshold (note that the value of
the previous sample, T4 sample, is greater than the Falling Threshold and the value of T5
sample). Alarm is not generated for T7 sample since an alarm is already generated for T5
sample and the curve is not in a downward trend around T7. A Rising Threshold crossing
alarm is generated again for T10 sample, because a Falling Threshold crossing alarm
(T5) has occurred after the previous Rising Threshold crossing alarm (T1).
- 201 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
‹ Event
This option allows you to configure the RMON event setting. Click on New to create an
entry.
To modify an entry, click on the index to select the entry, type in new value, and then click
on Modify. To delete an entry, click on the index to select the entry and then click on
Delete.
RMON Event setup
Label
Description
Description
Type in comment describing the event.
If an SNMP trap is to be sent, it will be sent to the SNMP community specified in
this column.
Community
Owner
Type in the RMON event owner.
Click on the drop-down list and select event type. Options are NONE, LOG (an
entry is made in the log table for each event), SNMPTRAP (an SNMP trap is
sent to one or more management stations), LOGANDTRAP (log and send trap).
Event Type
The value of System Up Time at the time this event entry last generated an
event.
LastTimeSent
- 202 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
‹ LOG
This option allows you to query the RMON LOG. Click on Query button to display the log.
Only the event indices with LOG or LOGANDTRAP event type (see previous section) are
possible to appear in the log.
- 203 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4.6.7.5 ADSL Day/Interval
This option allows you to query the ADSL PM 15-Min and Day Statistics. The IDL-2402
provides Today and Previous 1 day for Day PM, and also provides Current and Previous
1 ~ 96 interval for 15-Min PM. From the Maintenance menu, click on Performance
Monitoring and then ADSL Day/Interval. The following page is displayed. You can select
to display one interval or all intervals data of a single port; you can also select to display
one interval data for twelve ports (1~12, 13~24) at the same time.
ADSL PM Statistics
Label
Description
Click on the drop-down list and select the port range. Options are:
More Port
01~12, 13~24. This drop-down list is available only when All is selected in the
Port drop-down list.
- 204 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Click on the drop-down list and select a line port number (1 ~ 24). You can
also select All and then click on More Port to select a port range to view the
data of twelve ports at the same time.
Port
When you select to view a single port PM data, you can click on this checkbox
to display the data of all intervals.
All Interval
Query
Click on this button to get most recent data.
Click on this button to clear current PM data of the port you select.
Loss of Signal
Clear PM
LOS
LOF
Loss of Frame
LOM
Loss of Margin
LPR
Loss of Power (only for Far End)
Loss of Link (only for Near End)
Errored Seconds
LOL
ES
SES
Severely Errored Seconds
UAS
Unavailable Seconds
Re-Initialize
Initialize fail(s)
User Cell (CU)
Delineate Cell (CD)
HEC
Modem Re–initialization events (only for Near End)
Modem Failed Initialization events (only for Near End)
User Total Cell Count (only for Near End)
Delineated Total Cell Count (only for Near End)
ATM Header Error Count
IBE
Idle Cell Bit Error Count
Channel-CVs
Channel-FECCs
Channel PM - Code Violations
Channel PM- Forward Error Corrections
- 205 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. CLI Command Reference
Introduction
Access to the Operations System (OS) /Network Element (NE) system is protected by a
logon security system. You can log on to the NE with the user name and password. After
three failed logon attempts, the system refuses further attempts.
After you log on, the system monitors the interface for periods of inactivity. If the interface
is inactive for too long, you are automatically logged off.
All the NEs have the same initial user name (admin) and password (admin). You should
change the password as soon as possible, because the initial password is known to
anyone who reads this manual. You can also change the user name or add additional
user names. Use the “account add” command to enter a new user identification,
password and authorization level. The system can handle one local logon session and at
least four remote/OS sessions.
Connect Interface
Interface
Console
Telnet
Parameter
Baud rate: 9600, Data bit:8, Parity: None, Stop bit :1
Port 23
SSH
Port 22 (In Windows, you can run terminal emulator such as PuTTY)
Authorization Level
Level
Description
Super user
Engineer
Superuser can run all commands.
Engineer can run all commands except the commands for
creating/modifying/ deleting account and displaying running
configuration.
Guest
(default)
Guest can run most commands except the commands that have
creating/ modifying/deleting purpose.
- 206 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Screen Description
Screen Description
- 207 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Execution Modes
The CLI contains several execution modes. Users will see different set of commands
under different execution modes. Table 5-1 lists all the execution modes and their
purposes. When users enter a certain execution mode, the corresponding mode prompt
will be displayed automatically on the screen. The mode prompts of all the execution
modes are also listed in Table 5-1.
5-1 List of Execution Modes
Execute mode
Description
Prompt symbol
Initialize
Without login prompt or already
authenticated
>
Enable
Management capable
%
Configure
Interface
Configuration capable
(conf)#
Interface configure capable
Ethernet Interface configure capable
(intf-conf)#
Ethernet
Interface
(ethernet-intf-conf)#
ATM Bridge
ATM Bridge configuration capable
(bridge-atm-conf)#
(atm-desc-conf)#
ATM Description
ATM Description configuration
capable
ADSL config
IPOA config
ADSL line configuration capable
(adsl-intf-conf)#
(ipoa-intf-conf)#
IPoA routed mode configuration
capable
Bridge
Bridge configuration capable
ACL configuration capable
(bridge-eth-conf)#
(acl-conf)#
Access List
Service Profile
User/Line service profile
configuration capable
(service-profile)#
Spectrum Profile
Alarm Profile
Tca Profile
User/Line spectrum profile
configuration capable
(spectrum-profile)#
(alarm-profile)#
(tca-profile)#
User/Line alarm profile configuration
capable
User/Line tca profile configuration
capable
IGMP ACL
Profile
IGMP ACL profile configuration
capable
(igmpacl-profile)#
(rate-limit-profile)#
(prio-conf)#
Rate Limit Profile
Rate-Limit Policer profile
configuration capable
Priority List
Priority List configuration capable
- 208 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Getting help
The user can get help in two ways.
The first is by using the help command. The user can also enter a question mark ‘?’ at
each position in the command. The displayed result depends on the execution mode and
previous input.
Terminal Key Function
Following is the list of all the terminal keys and their function.
Table 5-1
List of Terminal Keys
TAB
Attempt to perform completion on the text before point
Display the next keyword of this command
Display help of command
TAB TAB
?
ENTER
Execute input
DEL or BACKSPACE Delete the character to the left of the cursor
UP Arrow
History of last input line
DOWN Arrow
History of previous input Line
Delete the character at point. If point is at the beginning of the
line, there are no characters in the line, and the last character
typed was not bound to delete-char, then return EOF.
CTRL-d
CTRL-a
CTRL-e
CTRL-f
CTRL-b
CTRL-c
CTRL-k
Move to the start of the line
Move to the end of the line
Move Forward one character
Move Back one character
Force to interrupt
Kill the text from the current cursor to the end
Move ‘back’ through the history list, fetching the previous
command.
CTRL-p
CTRL-n
CTRL-r
Move ‘forward’ through the history list, fetching the next
command.
Search backward starting at the current line and moving ‘up’
through the history as necessary. This is an incremental search.
- 209 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Drag the character before the cursor forward over the character
at the cursor, moving the cursor forward as well. If the insertion
point is at the end of the line, this transposes the last two
characters of the line. Negative arguments have no effect.
CTRL-t
CTRL-u
CTRL-w
Kill backward from the cursor to the beginning of the current line.
Kill the word behind point, using white space as a word
boundary. The killed text is saved on the kill-ring.
CTRL-y
CTRL-s
CTRL-q
CTRL-z
Yank the top of the kill ring into the buffer at point.
Terminal will not response to what the operator key in
Back to normal mode from terminal not responding mode
Exit current execution mode
- 210 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notation Conventions
The notation conventions for the parameter syntax of each CLI command are as follows:
‹ Parameters enclosed in [ ] are optional.
‹ Parameter values are separated by a vertical bar “|” only when one of the specified
values can be used.
‹ Parameter values are enclosed in { } when you must use one of the values specified.
About String-type Parameters
Some commands have string type parameters. When you type in the values of these
parameters, you must be careful not to use the keyword that is actually a part of some
command. For example, ‘account add default’ will cause a syntax mistake, since default
is the keyword of the command ‘igmp default’ and some other commands. Therefore, it is
recommended to add “ ” when you have to use the command keyword as the parameter
value. In this way, the keyword will be regarded as a common string. For example,
account add “default”.
- 211 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1 Global Commands
The Global commands can be used in all execution modes.
5.1.1 bye
Description
Syntax
Exit
bye
Parameter
None
5.1.2 cluster
Description
Syntax
Switch to a NE (network element) in the cluster
cluster <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<string>
NE name in the cluster you want to switch to.
Valid values: string type value.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.1.3 cluster local
Description
Syntax
Switch to Master in the cluster
cluster local
None
Parameter
5.1.4 disable
Description
Syntax
Go to Disable execution mode from logoff mode
disable
None
Parameter
5.1.5 end
Description
Syntax
Return to Enable mode
end
Parameter
None
5.1.6 exit
Description Go to previous execution mode
Syntax
exit
Parameter
None
- 212 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.7 help
Description
Display help
help
Syntax
Parameter
None
5.1.8 list
Description Display all commands of current mode
Syntax
list
Parameter
None
5.1.9 list opmode
Description List all the ADSL modes of operation.
Syntax
list opmode
None
Parameter
5.1.10 system contact
Description Set system contact
Syntax
system contact <contact>
Parameter
Name
Description
<contact>
System contact
Valid values: string type value. Max 63
characters.
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.1.11 system location
Description Set system location
Syntax
system location <location>
Parameter
Name
Description
<location>
System location
Valid values: string type value. Max 63
characters.
Default value: -
Type: Optional
- 213 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.1.12 system name
Description Set system name
Syntax
system name <name>
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
System name
Valid values: string type value. Max 32
characters.
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.1.13 system restart
Description Restart the system
Syntax
system restart
None
Parameter
- 214 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.2 Initialize Mode Commands
5.2.1 enable
Description Go to Enable execution mode from disable mode
Syntax
enable
None
Parameter
5.2.2 show license
Description Display GNU software license
Syntax
show license
None
Parameter
5.2.3 show time
Description Display current time
Syntax
show time
None
Parameter
5.2.4 show uptime
Description Display System up time and CPU loading
Syntax
show uptime
None
Parameter
5.2.5 show version
Description Display CLI software version
Syntax
show version
None
Parameter
- 215 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3 Enable Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Enable execution mode.
5.3.1 configure
Description Go to Configure execution mode from Enable mode.
Syntax
configure
None
Parameter
5.3.2 ping
Description ICMP echo and reply from hostname address or IP address. If no
reply for a long time, you can press Ctrl + c to interrupt ping.
Syntax
ping {ipv4 address}
ping {ipv4 address} count <count>
ping {ipv4 address} size <size>
ping {ipv4 address} count <count> size <size>
Parameter
Name
Description
ipv4 address
IPv4 address.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: -
count
size
The number of PING packets sent.
Default value: -
Packet size.
Default value: -
5.3.3 show access-list bcrate
Description Display all broadcast rate limiting list
Syntax
show access-list bcrate
None
Parameter
5.3.4 show access-list dstip
Description Display all dest IP deny access list or by index
Syntax
show access-list dstip [<index>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
Destination IP deny access list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
- 216 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.5 show access-list dstmac
Description Display all destination MAC address deny access list or by index
Syntax
show access-list dstmac [<index>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
Destination MAC deny access list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.6 show access-list ethertype
Description Display all EtherType deny access list or by index
Syntax
show access-list ethertype [<index>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
EtherType deny access list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.7 show access-list ip-allowed
Description Display all static IP allowed access list or by index
Syntax
show access-list ip-allowed [<index>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
Static IP allowed access list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
- 217 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.8 show access-list ipprotocol
Description Display all IP protocol deny access list or by index
Syntax
show access-list ipprotocol [<index>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
IP Protocol deny access list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.9 show access-list l4dstport
Description Display all L4 dest port deny access list or by index
Syntax
show access-list l4dstport [<index>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
L4 destination port deny access list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.10 show access-list mcfldrate
Description Display all flooding rate limiting list or by VLAN ID
Syntax
show access-list mcfldrate [vlan <VLAN ID>]
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.11 show access-list srcip
Description Display all source IP deny access list or by index
Syntax
show access-list srcip [<index>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
Source IP deny access list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
- 218 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.12 show access-list srcmac
Description Display all source mac address deny access list or by index
Syntax
show access-list srcmac [<index>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
Source MAC deny access list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.13 show account
Description Display system account list / detail information
Syntax
show account [detail]
None
Parameter
5.3.14 show aging
Description Display bridge aging time
Syntax
show aging
None
Parameter
5.3.15 show alarm current
Description Display current alarm list
Syntax
show alarm current
None
Parameter
5.3.16 show alarm event
Description Display event list
Syntax
show alarm event
None
Parameter
5.3.17 show alarm history
Description Display alarm history list
Syntax
show alarm history
None
Parameter
- 219 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.18 show atmdesc
Description Display ATM descriptor
Syntax
show atmdesc
None
Parameter
5.3.19 show atm-loopback
Description Display ATM loopback status (by port)
Syntax
show atm-loopback [<port>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.20 show cli-config
Description Display current setting for CLI configuration (timeout value, session
value)
Syntax
show cli-config
None
Parameter
5.3.21 show cluster
Description Display cluster configuration / Display cluster member list / Display
cluster status
Syntax
show cluster {config | member | status}
None
Parameter
5.3.22 show cpu
Description Display CPU information
Syntax
show cpu
None
Parameter
5.3.23 show dot1x
Description Display 802.1x information
Syntax
show dot1x
None
Parameter
- 220 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.24 show dot1x profile
Description Display 802.1x profile
Syntax
show dot1x profile
None
Parameter
5.3.25 show dot1x server
Description Display 802.1x server configuration
Syntax
show dot1x server
None
Parameter
5.3.26 show dot1x server <index>
Description Display 802.1x server configuration by index [1..3]
Syntax
show dot1x server <index>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
Display 802.1x server configuration by index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 3
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.27 show dsl-line-identify
Description Display DSL line identify information
Syntax
show dsl-line-identify
None
Parameter
5.3.28 show fdb
Description Display all MAC learning table or by VLAN ID
Syntax
show fdb [vlan <VLAN ID>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 221 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.29 show fdbstatic
Description Display all static MAC forwarding table or by index
Syntax
show fdbstatic [<index>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
Static MAC forwarding table number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 512
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.30 show firmware
Description Display firmware update status or partition information.
Note: the ‘Active’ status of the firmware partition information means
the active partition for next time restart, not current running
partition.
Ex.
local:%show firmware partition
Current Version:1.00B05
Partition
Version
Date
Status
-------------------------------------------------------------------
1
2
1.00B05t1
1.00B05
2008/7/4
--
2008/6/18 Active
Syntax
show firmware {status | partition}
None
Parameter
5.3.31 show help
Description Display Help
Syntax
show help
None
Parameter
5.3.32 show http
Description Display HTTP Web port
Syntax
show http
None
Parameter
- 222 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.33 show igmp
Description Display IGMP information
Syntax
show igmp
None
Parameter
5.3.34 show igmp group
Description Display IGMP VLAN group list
Syntax show igmp group list
show igmp group ip <ipv4 address> vlan <VLAN ID>
show igmp group ip <ipv4 address> vlan <VLAN ID> src list
show igmp group ip <ipv4 address> vlan <VLAN ID> src <ipv4
address>
Parameter
Name
Description
ipv4 address
IGMP group address
Valid values: 224.0.0.0 ~ 239.255.255.255
The range of addresses from 224.0.0.0 to
224.0.0.255 is reserved for the use of
routing protocols and other low-level
topology discovery or maintenance
protocols.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
VLAN ID.
VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.35 show igmp rtport
Description Display all IGMP router port list or by VLAN ID
Syntax
show igmp rtport [vlan <VLAN ID>]
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 223 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.36 show igmp-acl bind gigabit
Description Display IGMP ACL bind status for gigabit interface
Syntax
show igmp-acl bind gigabit <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
port
Gigabit Ethernet port number
Valid values: 1
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.37 show igmp-acl bind xdsl
Description Display IGMP ACL bind status for xdsl bridge port
Syntax
show igmp-acl bind xdsl <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
port
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.38 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe ds snr
Description Display carrier information of far-end snr downstream by Bridge
port (the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is
completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe ds snr
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 224 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.39 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe ds qln
Description Display carrier information of far-end qln downstream by Bridge
port (the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is
completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe ds qln
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.40 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe ds hlin
Description Display carrier information of far-end hlin downstream by Bridge
port (the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is
completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe ds hlin
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.41 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe ds hlog
Description Display carrier information of far-end hlog downstream by Bridge
port (the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is
completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe ds hlog
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 225 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.42 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe us load
Description Display carrier information of far-end load upstream by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe us load
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.43 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe us gain
Description Display carrier information of far-end gain upstream by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe us gain
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.44 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier fe us tss
Description Display carrier information of far-end tss upstream by Bridge port
(the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | port>} adsl carrier fe us tss
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 226 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.45 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne us snr
Description Display carrier information of near-end snr upstream by Bridge port
(the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne us snr
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.46 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne us qln
Description Display carrier information of near-end qln upstream by Bridge port
(the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne us qln
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.47 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne us hlin
Description Display carrier information of near-end hlin upstream by Bridge port
(the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne us hlin
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 227 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.48 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne us hlog
Description Display carrier information of near-end hlog upstream by Bridge
port (the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is
completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne us hlog
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.49 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne ds load
Description Display carrier information of near-end load downstream by Bridge
port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne ds load
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.50 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne ds gain
Description Display carrier information of near-end gain downstream by Bridge
port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne ds gain
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 228 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.51 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne ds tss
Description Display carrier information of near-end tss downstream by Bridge
port (the xdsl port must be in diagnostic mode and the test is
completed)
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl carrier ne ds tss
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.52 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl channel
Description Display xDSL line channel information by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl channel
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.53 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl failure
Description Display xDSL failure by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl failure
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 229 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.54 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl line
Description Display xDSL line status by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl line
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.55 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl line config
Description Display xDSL line configuration information by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl line config
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.56 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl line delt-test
Description Display xDSL line DELT test information by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl line delt-test
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 230 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.57 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl line information
Description Display xDSL line information by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl line information
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.58 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl inventory
Description Display xDSL inventory by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl inventory
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.59 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl operational
Description Display xDSL far-end/near-end operational information by Bridge
port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} adsl operational {fe | ne}
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 231 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.60 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} bridge
Description Display Bridge information by Bridge port
Syntax show interface xdsl {all | <port>} bridge
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.61 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} cellcount
Description Display ATM cell counter by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} cellcount
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.62 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} counter
Description Display Ethernet packet counter by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} counter
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 232 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.63 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} ipoa
Description Display IPoA (RFC 2684) information by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} ipoa
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.64 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} vc
Description Display VC information by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} vc
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.65 show interface xdsl {all | <port>} vlan
Description Display VLAN information by Bridge port
Syntax
show interface xdsl {all | <port>} vlan
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.66 show interface bridge
Description Display All interface Bridge information
Syntax
show interface bridge
None
Parameter
- 233 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.67 show interface counter
Description Display All interface Ethernet packet counter
Syntax
show interface counter
None
Parameter
5.3.68 show interface gigabit [<port>] bridge
Description Display Bridge information of the Gigabit Ethernet interface or by
Gigabit Ethernet port
Syntax
show interface gigabit [<port>] bridge
Parameter
Name
Description
port
Gigabit Ethernet port number
Valid values: 1
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.69 show interface gigabit [<port>] counter
Description Display Gigabit Ethernet counter of the Gigabit Ethernet interface or
by Gigabit Ethernet port
Syntax
show interface gigabit [<port>] counter
Parameter
Name
Description
port
Gigabit Ethernet port number
Valid values: 1
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.70 show interface gigabit [<port>] vlan
Description Display VLAN information of the Gigabit Ethernet interface or by
Gigabit Ethernet port
Syntax
show interface gigabit [<port>] vlan
Parameter
Name
Description
port
Gigabit Ethernet port number
Valid values: 1
Default value: -
Type: Optional
- 234 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.71 show mac-spoofing-detect config
Description Display MAC Spoofing Detect configuration
Syntax
show mac-spoofing-detect config
None
Parameter
5.3.72 show mac-spoofing-detect log
Description Display MAC Spoofing Detect log
Syntax
show mac-spoofing-detect log
None
Parameter
5.3.73 show management all
Description Display all system management port ip setting
Syntax
show management all
None
Parameter
5.3.74 show management gbe
Description Display GBE management port ip setting
Syntax
show management gbe
None
Parameter
5.3.75 show pm <port> adsl day
Description Display performance monitoring data for previous 1 day or current
day
Syntax
show pm <port> adsl day {<number> | current}
Parameter
Name
Description
port
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Day number
number
Valid values: 1~1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 235 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.76 show pm <port> adsl interval
Description Display performance monitoring data for previous 1~96 intervals or
current interval
Syntax
show pm <port> adsl interval {<number> | current}
Parameter
Name
Description
port
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Interval number
Valid values: 1~96
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
number
5.3.77 show port-template parameter
Description Display parameter mask. That is, display which profiles (or function)
of the template port are selected to be duplicated to other ports.
Mask means selected; Unmask means not-selected.
Syntax
show port-template parameter
None
Parameter
5.3.78 show priority-list ds
Description Display differentiated services priority list
Syntax
show priority-list ds [<number>]
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Differentiate services priority list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
- 236 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.79 show priority-list dstip
Description Display destination IP address priority list
Syntax
show priority-list dstip [<number>]
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Destination IP address priority list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.80 show priority-list dstmac
Description Display destination MAC address priority list
Syntax
show priority-list dstmac [<number>]
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Destination MAC address priority list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.81 show priority-list ethertype
Description Display specific Ether Type VLAN priority list
Syntax
show priority-list ethertype [<number>]
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Ether Type priority list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.82 show priority-list ipprotocol
Description Display IP Protocol VLAN priority list
Syntax
show priority-list ipprotocol [<number>]
Parameter
Name
Description
number
IP Protocol VLAN priority list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
- 237 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.83 show priority-list srcip
Description Display source IP address priority list
Syntax
show priority-list srcip [<number>]
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Source IP address priority list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.84 show priority-list srcmac
Description Display source MAC address priority list
Syntax
show priority-list srcmac [<number>]
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Source MAC address priority list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.85 show priority-list tos
Description Display ToS (IP Precedence) priority list
Syntax
show priority-list tos [<number>]
Parameter
Name
Description
number
ToS (IP Precedence) priority list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 238 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.86 show priority-list vlanid
Description Display VLAN ID priority list
Syntax
show priority-list vlanid [<number>]
Parameter
Name
Description
number
VLAN ID priority list number.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.87 show priority-queue config
Description Display Priority and Queue mapping configuration
Syntax
show priority-queue config
None
Parameter
5.3.88 show priority-regen
Description Display VLAN priority tag filter
Syntax
show priority-regen
None
Parameter
5.3.89 show profile alarm all
Description Display alarm profile
Syntax
show profile alarm all
None
Parameter
5.3.90 show profile igmp-acl
Description Display IGMP ACL profile
Syntax
show profile igmp-acl <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Profile index
Valid values: 1~15
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.91 show profile rate-limit policer
Description Display rate limit policer information
Syntax
show profile rate-limit policer
None
Parameter
- 239 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.92 show profile service adsl
Description Display ADSL service profile
Syntax
show profile service adsl {<number> | all}
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Profile index
Valid values: 1~120
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.93 show profile spectrum adsl
Description Display ADSL service profile
Syntax
show profile service adsl {<number> | all}
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Profile index
Valid values: 1~120
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.3.94 show profile tca adsl
Description Display one specified threshold crossing alert profile or all profiles
Syntax
show profile tca adsl {<index> | all}
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
Profile index
Valid values: 1~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 240 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.95 show rmon alarm
Description Display RMON alarm information
Syntax
show rmon alarm {all | <number>}
Parameter
Name
Description
number
RMON alarm entry index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.96 show rmon ether_history
Description Display RMON Ether history information
Syntax
show rmon ether_history <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
number
RMON index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.97 show rmon event
Description Display RMON event information
Syntax
show rmon event {all | <number>}
Parameter
Name
Description
number
RMON event entry index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 128
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.98 show rmon history
Description Display RMON history control information
Syntax
show rmon history {all | <number>}
Parameter
Name
Description
number
RMON history control entry index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 10
- 241 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.99 show rmon log
DescriptionDisplay RMON log
Syntax
show rmon log
None
Parameter
5.3.100 show rmon statistic
Description Display RMON statistic information
Syntax
show rmon statistic {all | <number>}
Parameter
Name
Description
number
RMON statistic entry index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.101 show route
Description Display GBE routing table and default gateway
Syntax
show route
None
Parameter
5.3.102 show runningcfg
Description Display running config
Syntax
show runningcfg
None
Parameter
5.3.103 show runningcfg interface gigabit
Description Display running config by Gigabit Ethernet interface
Syntax
show runningcfg interface gigabit <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
port
Gigabit port number
Valid values: 1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 242 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.104 show runningcfg interface xdsl
Description Display running config by XDSL interface
Syntax
show runningcfg interface xdsl <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
port
XDSL Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.105 show snmp
Description Display SNMP community/notify/target setting
Syntax
show snmp {community | notify | target}
None
Parameter
5.3.106 show sntp
Description Display SNTP setting
Syntax
show sntp
None
Parameter
5.3.107 show syslog server
DescriptionDisplay IP address of the syslog server
Syntax
show syslog server
None
Parameter
5.3.108 show system
Description Display system information/inventory/name/performance
Syntax
show system {information | inventory | name | performance}
None
Parameter
5.3.109 show tcm config
Description Display TCM (Three-Color Marking) Policer configuration
Syntax
show tcm config
None
Parameter
5.3.110 show tcm-policer
Description Display TCM Policer Binding Table
Syntax
show tcm-policer
None
Parameter
- 243 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.111 show temperature
Description Display system temperature
Syntax
show temperature
None
Parameter
5.3.112 show time
Description Display current time
Syntax
show time
None
Parameter
5.3.113 show uptime
Description Display System up time and CPU loading
Syntax
show uptime
None
Parameter
5.3.114 show version
Description Display CLI software version
Syntax
show version
None
Parameter
5.3.115 show version detail
Description Display CLI software version and system information
Syntax
show version detail
None
Parameter
5.3.116 show vlan
Description Display bridge port member set
Syntax
show vlan [<VLAN ID>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Optional
- 244 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.3.117 show vlan ethertype
Description Show VLAN S-Tag Ether type
Syntax
show vlan ethertype
None
Parameter
5.3.118 show vlan protocol-base
Description Display protocol based VLAN table
Syntax
show vlan ethertype
None
Parameter
5.3.119 show vlan-translation one-to-one
Description Display one-to-one VLAN translation table
Syntax
show vlan-translation one-to-one
None
Parameter
5.3.120 show vlan-translation many-to-one
Description Display many-to-one VLAN translation table
Syntax
show vlan-translation many-to-one
None
Parameter
5.3.121 telnet
Description Telnet to a destination (if you’re connecting to the DSLAM through
its console port, this command is not provided)
Syntax
telnet <target address>
Parameter
Name
Description
target address IPV4 address or hostname
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.3.122 traceroute
Description Trace route (and not use ICMP ECHO instead of UDP datagrams)
Syntax
traceroute <target address> [no_icmp]
Parameter
Name
target address IPV4 address
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Description
(xxx:0~255)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 245 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4 Configure Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Configure execution mode.
5.4.1 access-list
Description Go to access-list execution mode from Configure mode.
Syntax
access-list
None
Parameter
5.4.2 account add
Description Add new account
Syntax
account add <name>
account add <name> password <password> comment <comment>
account add <name> password <password> level <level>
[comment <comment>]
account add <name> password <password> password-expiration
<day number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
ID name (max 31 characters).
Only 0-9, a-z, A-Z, and symbol “_-.” are
accepted for account name. For example,
abc_12_XYZ-10.1 is a valid user name. Note
that the IDL-2402 does not accept user
names beginning with a digital number. For
example, 123abc or 123456 are not a valid
name.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<password>
<level>
Input password (max 31 characters)
Default value: space char
Type: Optional
Set access level
Valid values: superuser, engineer, guest
Default value: guest
Type: Optional
<comment>
Set comment (max 31 characters)
Default value: space char
Type: Optional
- 246 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<day number> Set password expiration days (0:disable)
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.4.3 account delete
Description Delete account
Syntax account delete <name>
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
ID name (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.4 account modify
Description Modify account
Syntax account modify <name> comment <comment>
account modify <name> password <password> [{ level <level>
[comment <comment>] | comment <comment> |
password-expiration <day number> }]
account modify <name> level <level> [comment <comment>]
account modify <name> password-expiration <day number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
ID name (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<password>
<level>
Input password (max 31 characters)
Default value: space char
Type: Optional
Set access level
Valid values: superuser, engineer, guest
Default value: guest
Type: Optional
<comment>
day number
Set comment (max 31 characters)
Default value: space char
Type: Optional
Set password expiration days (0:disable)
- 247 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.4.5 aging
Description Bridge aging time
Syntax aging <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Aging time (sec).
Valid values: (10~1000000) sec.
Default value: 300
Type: Mandatory
5.4.6 alarm event clear
Description Clear alarm event log
Syntax
alarm event clear
None
Parameter
5.4.7 alarm history clear
Description Clear alarm history
Syntax
alarm history clear
None
Parameter
5.4.8 atmdesc
Description Go to ATM-description execution mode from Configure mode
Syntax
atmdesc
None
Parameter
5.4.9 atm-loopback
Description ATM loopback testing OAM Cell Generation enable / OAM Cell
Generation disable / Set ATM loopback type or clear loopback
status for a PVC
Syntax
atm-loopback enable
atm-loopback disable
atm-looback <port>/<pvc> {type <type> | clear}
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
- 248 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
PVC number
<pvc>
Valid values: 1~8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
ATM loopback type
Valid values: f5-e2e, f5-segment
Default value: -
<type>
Type: Mandatory
5.4.10 cli-config session
Description Set CLI max number of connection sessions
Syntax
cli-config session <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Set CLI max number of connection sessions
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: 5
Type: Mandatory
5.4.11 cli-config timeout
Description Set CLI configuration timeout value
Syntax
cli-config timeout <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Set CLI connection timeout value
Valid values: 180~3600 (sec)
Default value: 300 (sec)
Type: Mandatory
5.4.12 cluster-cfg domain
Description Set cluster domain name
Syntax
cluster-cfg domain <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<string>
Cluster domain name
- 249 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: (max length 31)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.13 cluster-cfg management
Description Set cluster management IP configuration
Syntax cluster-cfg management {ip <ipv4 address> | netmask <netmask> |
gateway <ipv4 address>}
Parameter
Name
<ipv4 address> IP address.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Description
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
<netmask>
Netmask of the management port.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.4.14 cluster-cfg name
Description Set the NE name in a cluster
Syntax
cluster-cfg name <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<string>
A name for NE Identification.
Valid values: (max length 31)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.15 cluster-cfg role
Description Set cluster role to System-decide or Slave only or Not in a cluster
(default)
Syntax
cluster-cfg role {cluster | slave-only | individual}
None
Parameter
- 250 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.16 cluster-cfg voting-key
Description Set cluster voting-key for the priority to be a Master
Syntax
cluster-cfg voting-key <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Cluster voting key.
Valid values: 0 ~ 4294967295
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.4.17 dot1x
Description Go to 802.1x configuration mode
Syntax
dot1x
None
Parameter
5.4.18 dot1x disable
Description disable 802.1x authentication function of the system
Syntax
dot1x disable
None
Parameter
5.4.19 dot1x enable
Description Enable 802.1x authentication function of the system
Syntax
dot1x enable
None
Parameter
5.4.20 dsl-line-identify dhcp
Description Set DHCP Relay Option82 enable/disable
Syntax
dsl-line-identify dhcp {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.4.21 dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 circuit
Description Set DHCP Option82 Circuit ID type (default type is <DSLAM
name>:<circuit number>:<vpi>:<vci>, or customer-defined type)
Syntax
dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 circuit {default | customer}
None
Parameter
- 251 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.22 dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 dslam-name
Description Set DSLAM name
Syntax
dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 dslam-name <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<string>
Set DSLAM name (max length 15)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.23 dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 dslam-name-cluster
Description Set DSLAM name by Cluster name
Syntax
dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 dslam-name-cluster
None
Parameter
5.4.24 dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 dslam-name-customer
Description Set DSLAM name by customer defined
Syntax
dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 dslam-name-customer
None
Parameter
5.4.25 dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 sub
Description Set DHCP Option82 sub mode (send Circuit ID/send Remote
ID/send Both)
Syntax
dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 sub {circuit | remote | both}
None
Parameter
5.4.26 dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 remote
Description Set Remote ID type as Default / Line ID / Line Description / Line
phone number / Customer (default type is <DSLAM name>:<bridge
port index>; customer type means the customer-defined type)
Syntax dsl-line-identify dhcp option82 remote {default | line-id | line-descr |
line-phone | customer}
Parameter
None
- 252 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.27 dsl-line-identify pppoe srv-name
Description Set Service Name
Syntax
dsl-line-identify pppoe srv-name <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<string>
Set Service name
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.28 dsl-line-identify pppoe srv-name-check
Description Disable/Enable PPPoE Service Name check
Syntax
dsl-line-identify pppoe srv-name-check {disable | enable}
None
Parameter
5.4.29 fdbstatic <number> {xdsl | gigabit}
Description Static MAC forwarding table setting
Syntax fdbstatic <number> xdsl <port>/<pvc> vlan <VLAN ID> mac <mac
address> {deny | pass}
fdbstatic <number> gigabit <port> vlan <VLAN ID> mac <mac
address> {deny | pass}
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Static MAC forwarding table number
Valid values: 1~512
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<port>
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
PVC number
<pvc>
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
VLAN ID
<VLAN ID>
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 253 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<mac address> MAC address
Valid values: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (xx:00~ff)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.30 fdbstatic <number> disable
Description Disable specify static MAC forwarding entry
Syntax
fdbstatic <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Static MAC forwarding table number
Valid values: 1~512
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.31 fdbstatic list
Description Show static MAC forwarding table or specified static MAC
forwarding entry
Syntax
fdbstatic [<number>] list
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Static MAC forwarding table number
Valid values: 1~512
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.4.32 firmware bootcode-upgrade
Description Get bootcode from FTP server and write to Flash ROM
Syntax
firmware bootcode-upgrade <filename>
Parameter
Name
Description
<filename>
Boot code path and file name (max 31
characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 254 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.33 firmware login
Description Login FTP server that firmware image belongs to
Syntax
firmware login <ipv4 address> username <name> password
<password>
Parameter
Name
<ipv4 address> IPV4 address
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Description
(xxx:0~255)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<name>
User name (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<password>
Input password (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.34 firmware partition
Description Set booting partition
Syntax
firmware partition <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Partition number
Valid values: 1~2
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.35 firmware upgrade
Description Get firmware image from FTP server and write to Flash ROM
Syntax
firmware upgrade <filename>
Parameter
Name
Description
<filename>
Path and File name (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 255 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.36 http port
Description Set http server listening port
Syntax http port <port number>
Parameter
Name
Description
port number
The port number.
Valid values: Integer range 0-65535
Default value: 80
Type: Mandatory
5.4.37 igmp acl
Description IGMP ACL control mode
Syntax
igmp acl {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.4.38 igmp default
Description IGMP set default
Syntax
igmp [default]
None
Parameter
5.4.39 igmp deny no-router-alert
Description Enable or disable the function that the system will deny IGMP
packets that have no router alert option in their IP header. Default is
“disable”; the system doesn’t care router alert option.
Syntax
igmp deny no-router-alert {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.4.40 igmp disable
Description Disable snooping mode and proxy mode
Syntax
igmp disable
None
Parameter
5.4.41 igmp max-group-limit
Description Enable or disable the function that maximum active counter of
IGMP groups can be joined for every bridge port will be limited.
Syntax
igmp max-group-limit {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
- 256 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.42 igmp proxy
Description Enable GMP proxy snooping mode
Syntax
igmp proxy
None
Parameter
5.4.43 igmp snooping
Description Enable IGMP normal snooping mode
Syntax
igmp snooping
None
Parameter
5.4.44 igmp rtport gigabit
Description Set IGMP router port (giga1) and set IGMP router IP address
Syntax igmp rtport gigabit <port> vlan <VLAN ID> [disable | ip <ipv4
address>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ipv4 address> Set router IP address for proxy mode IGMP
general query packet reference.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Optional
5.4.45 igmp rtport list
Description Show IGMP router port list
Syntax
igmp rtport list [<VLAN ID>]
Parameter
Name
Description
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 257 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.46 igmp timeout
Description IGMP timeout setting (BC/LMQT/MRT/Query/URI)
Syntax
igmp timeout {bc | lmqt | mrt | query | uri} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Timeout value
Valid values: 1~500 (second)
Default value: BC: 400
LMQT: 1
MRT: 10
Query: 125
URI: 1
Type: Mandatory
5.4.47 igmp version
Description Set IGMP protocol version
Syntax
igmp version {v1 | v2 | v3}
None
Parameter
5.4.48 interface gigabit
Description Go to Gigabit Ethernet Interface execution mode from Configure
mode
Syntax
interface gigabit <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Gigabit Ethernet port number
Valid values: 1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.49 interface xdsl
Description Go to xDSL Interface execution mode from Configure mode
Syntax
interface xdsl <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 258 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.50 mac-spoofing-detect
Description Enable/Disable MAC spoofing detection
Syntax
mac-spoofing-detect {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.4.51 mac-spoofing-detect log
Description Enable/Disable MAC spoofing detection log
Syntax
mac-spoofing-detect log {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.4.52 management gbe
Description Set GBE port IP address
Syntax
management gbe <ipv4 adderss>
Parameter
Name
Description
ipv4 address
IP address.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
5.4.53 management gbe vlan
Description Set incoming VLAN tag management (only allowing incoming
packets with the specified VLAN ID or no limit of VLAN ID)
Syntax
management gbe vlan <VLAN ID> {no-limit | <VLAN ID>}
Parameter
Name
Description
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 259 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.54 management gbe vlan priority
Description Set priority level of the inband management traffic sent out from
GBE port
Syntax
management gbe vlan priority <prio ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<prio ID>
Priority ID
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.4.55 pm clear
Description Clear current performance monitoring data.
Syntax
pm clear <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.56 port-template mask
Description Mask the function (profile) of template line port. Mask means to
select this item to be copied to other ports.
Syntax port-template mask {xdsl-lineconf | xdsl-profile | xdsl-adminstatus |
dsl-dentify-trust | pvc-vlan-bridge | igmp-acl | filter | priority-remark |
priority-regen | ethernet-policer}
Parameter
None
5.4.57 port-template unmask
Description Unmask the function (profile) of template line port. Un-Mask means
not to select this item to be copied to other ports.
Syntax port-template unmask {xdsl-lineconf | xdsl-profile |
xdsl-adminstatus | dsl-dentify-trust | pvc-vlan-bridge | igmp-acl |
filter | priority-remark | priority-regen | ethernet-policer}
Parameter
None
- 260 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.58 port-template template-port
Description Select the template line port and pasted line port (copy
configuration from template port)
Syntax
port-template template-port <port> paste-port <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
XDSL Port number
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.59 priority-list
Description Go to Priority-list execution mode from Configure mode.
Syntax
priority-list
None
Parameter
5.4.60 priority-queue atm priority
Description Set ATM interface priority queue mapping
Syntax
priority-queue atm priority <prio ID> queue <number>
Parameter
Name
<prio ID>
Description
Priority ID
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
<number>
Priority queue value.
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.61 priority-queue atm queue0-weight
Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 0
Syntax
priority-queue atm queue0-weight <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 0
Valid values: 1 ~ 255
Default value: 10
Type: Mandatory
- 261 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.62 priority-queue atm queue1-weight
Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 1
Syntax
priority-queue atm queue1-weight <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 1
Valid values: 1 ~ 255
Default value: 20
Type: Mandatory
5.4.63 priority-queue atm queue2-weight
Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 2
Syntax
priority-queue atm queue2-weight <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 2
Valid values: 1 ~ 255
Default value: 30
Type: Mandatory
5.4.64 priority-queue atm queue3-weight
Description Set weight value of ATM Priority Queue 3
Syntax
priority-queue atm queue3-weight <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Weight value of ATM Priority Queue 3
Valid values: 1 ~ 255
Default value: 40
Type: Mandatory
5.4.65 priority-queue atm scheduling
Description Set priority queue scheduling only support SPQ mode or support
SQP and WFQ modes
Syntax
priority-queue atm scheduling {sqp | spq-wfq}
None
Parameter
- 262 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.66 priority-queue gigabit priority
Description Set gigabit interface priority queue mapping
Syntax
priority-queue atm priority <prio ID> queue <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<prio ID>
Priority ID
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
Priority queue value.
Valid values: 0 ~ 3
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<number>
5.4.67 profile alarm
Description Enter this command to go to alarm profile configuration mode.
Syntax
profile alarm
None
Parameter
5.4.68 profile igmp-acl
Description Enter this command to go to IGMP ACL profile configuration mode
Syntax
profile igmp-acl <profile index>
Parameter
Name
<profile index> Profile index
Valid values: 1~15
Description
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.69 profile service adsl
Description Enter this command to go to service profile configuration mode or
delete a service profile
Syntax
profile service adsl <profile index> [disable]
Parameter
Name
<profile index> Profile index
Valid values: 2 ~ 120
Description
- 263 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.70 profile spectrum
Description Enter this command to go to spectrum profile configuration mode or
delete a spectrum profile
Syntax
[disable]
profile spectrum {adsl2 | adsl2plus | readsl2} <profile index>
Parameter
Name
Description
profile index
Profile index
Valid values: 2 ~ 120
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.71 profile tca xdsl
Description Enter this command to go to TCA profile configuration mode or
delete the specified TCA profile
Syntax
profile tca xdsl <index> [disable]
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
TCA profile index.
Valid values: 2~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.72 profile rate-limit
Description Enter this command to go to rate-limit profile configuration mode
Syntax
profile tca xdsl <index> [disable]
None
Parameter
- 264 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.73 remotecfg login
Description Login FTP server to get remote configuration and load it to running
configuration or write remote configuration to memory
Syntaxremotecfg login <ipv4 address> get <filename> {load | write partition
<number>}
Parameter
Name
<ipv4 address> IP address of TFTP server.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Description
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<filename>
<number>
Remote path and file name (max 31
character)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Partition number
Valid values: 1~2
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.74 restore-factory
Description Restore factory setting (User needs to restart the system after
restore-factory to make the setting take effect.)
Syntax
restore-factory
None
Parameter
5.4.75 rmon alarm <index> alarm_interval
Description Set RMON alarm interval
Syntax rmon alarm <index> alarm_interval <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON alarm entry index
Valid values: 1~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Alarm interval.
<number>
Valid values: 0~2147483647 (0: disable)
- 265 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.76 rmon alarm <index> delete
Description Delete RMON alarm entry
Syntax rmon alarm <index> delete <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON alarm entry index
Valid values: 1~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.77 rmon alarm <index> falling_eventindex
Description Set RMON alarm falling event index
Syntax rmon alarm <index> falling_eventindex <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON alarm entry index
Valid values: 1~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<number>
RMON alarm falling event index
Valid values: 1~128
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.78 rmon alarm <index> falling_threshold
Description Set RMON alarm falling threshold
Syntax rmon alarm <index> falling_threshold <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON alarm entry index
Valid values: 1~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 266 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<number>
RMON alarm falling threshold
Valid values: 0~4294967295
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.79 rmon alarm <index> owner
Description RMON alarm owner
Syntax rmon alarm <index> owner <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<string>
Owner name.
Valid values: (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.80 rmon alarm <index> rising_eventindex
Description Set RMON alarm rising event index
Syntax rmon alarm <index> rising_eventindex <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON alarm entry index
Valid values: 1~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<number>
RMON alarm rising event index
Valid values: 1~128
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.81 rmon alarm <index> rising_threshold
Description Set RMON alarm rising threshold
Syntax rmon alarm <index> rising_threshold <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON alarm entry index
Valid values: 1~64
- 267 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<number>
RMON alarm rising threshold
Valid values: 0~4294967295
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.82 rmon alarm <index> sample_type
Description RMON alarm sample type (Compared directly with the thresholds
or Difference compared with the thresholds)
Syntax rmon alarm <index> sample_type {absolute | delta}
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON alarm entry index
Valid values: 1~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.83 rmon alarm <index> startup_alarm
DescriptionRMON startup alarm (Rising threshold alarm, Falling threshold alarm
or Both rising and falling threshold alarm)
Syntaxrmon alarm <index> startup_alarm {rising | falling | both}
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON alarm entry index
Valid values: 1~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.84 rmon alarm <index> variable
Description Source sample in statistic table
Description
Variable
rx_broadcast
rx_bytes
Monitoring rx broadcast packets
Monitoring rx bytes packets
rx_dropped
rx_err_aligment
Monitoring rx dropped packets
Monitoring rx error aligment packets
- 268 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
rx_fragments
rx_jabber
Monitoring rx fragments packets
Monitoring rx jabber packets
Monitoring rx multicast packets
Monitoring rx oversize packets
Monitoring rx packets
rx_multicast
rx_oversize
rx_packets
rx_undersize
Monitoring rx undersize packets
tx_single_collision Monitoring tx single collision packets
txrx_frames_64 Monitoring tx 64 octets
txrx_frames_127 Monitoring tx 65 to 127 octets
txrx_frames_255 Monitoring tx 128 to 255 octets
txrx_frames_511 Monitoring tx 256 to 511 octets
txrx_frames_1023 Monitoring tx 512 to 1023 octets
txrx_frames_1518 Monitoring tx 1024 to 1518 octets
Syntax
rmon alarm <index> variable {rx_broadcast | rx_bytes | rx_dropped
| rx_err_aligment | rx_fragments | rx_jabber | rx_multicast |
rx_oversize | rx_packets | rx_undersize} index <number>
rmon alarm <index> variable {tx_single_collision | txrx_frames_64 |
txrx_frames_127 | txrx_frames_255 | txrx_frames_511 |
txrx_frames_1023 | txrx_frames_1518} index <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON alarm entry index
Valid values: 1~64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<number>
Source index in statistic table
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.85 rmon event <index> community
Description Set RMON event community
Syntax
rmon event <index> community <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON event entry index
- 269 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: 1~128
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<string>
RMON event community
Valid values: string type value. (max 31
characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.86 rmon event <index> delete
Description Delete RMON event entry
Syntax
rmon event <index> delete
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON event entry index
Valid values: 1~128
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.87 rmon event <index> description
Description Description for the RMON event
Syntax
rmon event <index> description <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON event entry index
Valid values: 1~128
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Event description
<string>
Valid values: string type value. (max 31
characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 270 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.88 rmon event <index> owner
Description Set RMON event owner
Syntax
rmon event <index> owner <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON event entry index
Valid values: 1~128
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Owner name
<string>
Valid values: string type value. (max 31
characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.89 rmon event <index> type
Description Set RMON event type (no alarm, only syslog, only SNMP trap, or
both syslog and SNMP trap)
Syntax
rmon event <index> type {none | log | trap | both}
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON event entry index
Valid values: 1~128
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.90 rmon history <index> buckets_requested
Description Set RMON history buckets requested
Syntax
rmon history <index> buckets_requested <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON history control entry index
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<number>
Buckets requested value
- 271 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: 1~65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.91 rmon history <index> delete
Description Delete RMON history entry
Syntax
rmon history <index> delete
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON history control entry index
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4 92 rmon history <index> ifc
Description Set Physical interface
Syntax
rmon history <index> ifc <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON history control entry index
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<number>
Physical interface index
Valid values: 1~2
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.93 rmon history <index> interval
Description Set RMON history interval
Syntax
rmon history <index> interval <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON history control entry index
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: -
- 272 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Type: Mandatory
<number>
History interval
Valid values: 1~3600 (sec)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.94 rmon history <index> owner
Description Set RMON history owner
Syntax
rmon history <index> owner <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON history control entry index
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Owner name
<string>
Valid values: string type value. (max 31
characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.95 rmon statistic <index> delete
Description Delete RMON statistic entry
Syntax
rmon statistic <index> delete
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON statistic entry index
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 273 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.96 rmon statistic <index> ifc
Description Set Physical interface
Syntax
rmon statistic <index> ifc <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON history control entry index
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<number>
Physical interface index
Valid values: 1~2
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.97 rmon statistic <index> owner
Description Set RMON statistic owner
Syntax
rmon statistic <index> owner <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
RMON history control entry index
Valid values: 1~10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Owner name
<string>
Valid values: string type value. (max 31
characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.98 route
Description Add routing to route table
Syntax
route <ipv4 address > netmask <ipv4 address > gateway <ipv4
address >
Parameter
Name
Description
<ipv4 address> IP address.
- 274 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.99 route default
Description Set default route
Syntax
route default <ipv4 address>
Parameter
Name
<ipv4 address> Default route IP address.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Description
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.100 route delete
Description Delete routing from route table
Syntax
route delete <ipv4 address> netmask <ipv4 address>
Parameter
Name
<ipv4 address> IP address.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Description
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.101 runningcfg active partition
Description There are two memory partitions for storing the configuration data.
This command allows you to select the flash boot point (partition)
for next power-on.
Syntax
runningcfg active partition <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Partition number
Valid values: 1~2
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 275 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.102 runningcfg load partition
Description Load running configuration from memory
Syntax
runningcfg load partition <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Partition number
Valid values: 1~2
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.103 runningcfg login
Description Login FTP server
Syntax
runningcfg login <ipv4 address> put <filename>
Parameter
Name
<ipv4 address> IP address of TFTP server.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Description
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<filename>
Path and File name (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.104 runningcfg write partition
Description Write running configuration to memory
Syntax
runningcfg write partition <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Partition number
Valid values: 1~2
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.105 snmp <index> community
Description Set SNMP read only or read/write community string
Syntax
snmp <index> community {ro | rw} <community>
Parameter
Name
Description
- 276 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<index>
SNMP community index
Valid values: 1~32
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<community> Community string. (max 31 character; note
that community names beginning with a
digital number are not allowed)
Default value: public
Type: Mandatory
5.4.106 snmp notify
DescriptionSet SNMP notify information / Delete SNMP notify tag
Syntax
snmp notify <name> {tag <tag> | delete}
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
Notify name string. (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<tag>
Notify Tag string. (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.107 snmp target <name> address
Description Set SNMP target address
Syntax
snmp target <name> address <ipv4 address> port <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
SNMP target name
Valid values: (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ipv4 address> Target IP address
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
SNMP target port
Valid values: 1~65535
<port>
- 277 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: 162
Type: Mandatory
5.4.108 snmp target <name> delete
Description Delete SNMP target tag list
Syntax
snmp target <name> delete
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
SNMP target name
Valid values: (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.109 snmp target <name> tag-list
Description Set SNMP target tag list
Syntax
snmp target <name> tag-list <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
SNMP target name
Valid values: (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<string>
SNMP target tag list
Valid values: (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.110 snmp target <name> version
Description Set SNMP target trap version to V1 or V2C
Syntax
snmp target <name> version {v1 | v2c}
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
SNMP target name
Valid values: (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 278 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.111 sntp polling interval
Description Set SNTP polling interval
Syntax
sntp polling interval <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
Polling interval (in seconds)
Valid values: 60~65535
Default value: 600
number
Type: Mandatory
5.4.112 sntp server address
Description Set SNTP server ip address
Syntax
snmp server address <ipv4 address>
Parameter
Name
<ipv4 address> IP address of SNTP server.
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Description
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
5.4.113 syslog server
Description Set system log server
Syntax
syslog server <ipv4 address>
Parameter
Name
<ipv4 address> Syslog server IP address
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Description
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
5.4.114 tcm color-aware
Description Set Color Aware or Color Blind TCM Policer
Syntax
tcm color-aware {aware | blind}
None
Parameter
- 279 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.115 tcm color-field
Description Set TCM color field to be VLAN priority or DSCP.
Syntax
tcm color-field {vprio | dscp}
None
Parameter
5.4.116 tcm green
Description Set TCM green color value
Syntax
tcm green <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
TCM green color value
Valid values: 0 ~ 7 for VLAN priority color
field;
0 ~ 63 for DSCP color field
Default value: 1
Type: Mandatory
5.4.117 tcm non-conform-pkt
Description Set the action for non-conforming packets: discard or tag. If “Tag” is
selected, then all the packets will be marked as green, yellow, or
red in the Color field.
Syntax
tcm non-conform-pkt {discard | tag}
None
Parameter
5.4.118 tcm red
Description Set TCM red color value
Syntax
tcm red <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
TCM red color value
Valid values: 0 ~ 7 for VLAN priority color
field;
0 ~ 63 for DSCP color field
Default value: 7
Type: Mandatory
- 280 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.119 tcm yellow
Description Set TCM yellow color value
Syntax
tcm yellow <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
TCM yellow color value
Valid values: 0 ~ 7 for VLAN priority color
field;
0 ~ 63 for DSCP color field
Default value: 3
Type: Mandatory
5.4.120 temperature threshold
Description Shelf temperature threshold
Syntax
temperature threshold {up | down | fan} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Temperature threshold value.
Valid values: up: -55~85
Down: -55~85
fan: -40~15
Default value: up: 65
down: 65
fan: -40
Type: Mandatory
5.4.121 temperature shelf time
Description Shelf time
Syntax
temperature shelf time {up | down} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Shelf time value.
Valid values: 1~255
Default value: 10
Type: Mandatory
- 281 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.122 time set date
Description Set date of the system (default is current system date)
Syntax
time set date {MM-DD-YY | MM-DD-CCYY}
Parameter
Name
Description
MM
Month.
Valid values: 01-12
Type: Mandatory
Day of month.
DD
CC
YY
Valid values: 01-31
Type: Mandatory
Century.
Valid values: 0
Type: Optional
Short year start from 2000.
Valid values: 00-99
Type: Mandatory
5.4.123 time set time
Description Set time of the system (default is current system time)
Syntax
time set time {hh:mm | hh:mm:ss}
Parameter
Name
Description
hh
Hour in 24 hour format
Valid values: 00-23
Type: Mandatory
Minute.
mm
ss
Valid values: 00-59
Type: Mandatory
Second
Valid values: 00-59
Type: Optional
- 282 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.124 time set timezone
Description Set timezone
Syntax
time set timezone <timezone>
Parameter
Name Description
timezone Timezone
Type: Mandatory
Valid values: Given below.
idl
(GMT-12:00) International Date Line
idlw
nt
(GMT-12:00) International Date Line West
(GMT-11:00) Nome Time
ahst
hst
bdt
cat
yst
hdt
pst
ydt
mst
pdt
cst
mdt
est
cdt
ast
edt
nst
adt
bst
gst
at
(GMT-10:00) Alaska GMT Hawaii Standard Time
(GMT-10:00) Hawaiian Standard Time
(GMT-10:00) BDT
(GMT-10:00) Central Alaska Time
(GMT-09:00) Yukon Standard Time
(GMT-09:00) HDT
(GMT-08:00) Pacific Standard Time
(GMT-08:00) YDT
(GMT-07:00) Mountain Standard Time
(GMT-07:00) Pacific Daylight Time
(GMT-06:00) Central Standard Time
(GMT-06:00) Mountain Daylight Time
(GMT-05:00) Eastan Standard Time
(GMT-05:00) Central Daylight Time
(GMT-04:00) Atlantic Standard Time
(GMT-04:00) Eastan Daylight Time
(GMT-03:30) Newfoundland Standard Time
(GMT-03:00) Altantic Daylight Time
(GMT-03:00) Brazil Standard Time
(GMT-03:00) Greenland Standard Time
(GMT-02:00) Azores Time
wat
gmt
wet
ut
(GMT-01:00) West Africa Time
(GMT)
Greenwich Mean Time
(GMT+00:00) Western European Time
(GMT+00:00) Universal Time
utc
cet
met
mewt
swt
fwt
eet
mest
fst
(GMT+00:00) Universal Time
(GMT+01:00) Central European Time
(GMT+01:00) Middle European Time
(GMT+01:00) Middle Eruopean Winter Time
(GMT+01:00) Swedish Winter Time
(GMT+01:00) French Winter Time
(GMT+02:00) Eastean European Time
(GMT+02:00) Middle European Summer Time
(GMT+02:00) French Summer Time
(GMT+02:00) Egypt Standard Time
(GMT+03:00) Egypt Daylight Time
(GMT+03:00) Baghdad Time
es
ed
bt
it
(GMT+03:30) Iran Time
zp4
zp5
ist
zp6
sst
wast
jt
(GMT+04:00) GMT Plus 4 Hours
(GMT+05:00) GMT Plus 5 Hours
(GMT+05:30) Indian Standard Time
(GMT+06:00) GMT Plus 6 Hours
(GMT+07:00) South Smatra Time
(GMT+07:00) West Australian Standard Time
(GMT+07:30) Java Time
cct
hst
(GMT+08:00) China Coast Time
(GMT+08:00) HongKong Standard Time
- 283 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
wadt
wst
jst
(GMT+08:00) West Australian Daylight Time
(GMT+08:00) WST
(GMT+09:00) Japan Standard Time
(GMT+09:00) Korean Standard Time
(GMT+09:30) Central Australian Standard Time
(GMT+09:30) South Australian Standard Time
(GMT+10:00) JDT
kst
cast
sast
jdt
gst
(GMT+10:00) Guam Standard Time
(GMT+10:00) East Australian Standard Time
(GMT+10:30) Central Austrlian Daylight Time
(GMT+10:30) South Australian Daylight Time
(GMT+11:00) East Australian Daylight Time
(GMT+12:00) New Zealand Time
east
cadt
sadt
eadt
nzt
nzst
idle
nzdt
(GMT+12:00) New Zealand Standard Time
(GMT+12:00) International Date Line East
(GMT+13:00) New Zealand Daylight Time
5.4.125 vlan ethertype s-tag
Description Set VLAN S-Tag Ether Type value
Syntax
vlan ethertype s-tag <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
S-Tag Ether type value
Valid values: 0x0001 ~ 0xffff
Default value: 0x8100
Type: Mandatory
5.4.126 vlan protocol-base
Description Set Protocol Based VLAN table / Delete the specified entry from
Protocol Based VLAN table
Syntax
vlan protocol-base <index> {ethertype <number> vlan <VLAN ID> |
disable}
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
Protocol Based VLAN table index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 32
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<number>
Ether type value
Valid values: 0x0001 ~ 0xffff
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 284 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.127 vlan-translation <port>/<pvc> <VLAN ID> gigabit <port> one-to-one
Description Set one-to-one VLAN translation
Syntax 1. C-tag reserved
vlan-translation <port>/<pvc> <user port VLAN ID> gigabit <port>
one-to-one reserved {priority-reserved | priority-replaced <PRIO ID>}
2. C-tag replaced
vlan-trans vlan-translation <port>/<pvc> <user port VLAN ID> gigabit
<port> one-to-one replaced <uplink VLAN ID> {priority-reserved |
priority-replaced <PRIO ID>}
3. Stacking and C-tag reserved
vlan-trans vlan-translation <port>/<pvc> <user port VLAN ID> gigabit
<port> one-to-one stacking <uplink VLAN ID> {priority-reserved |
priority-replaced <PRIO ID>}
4. Stacking and C-tag replaced
vlan-translation <port>/<pvc> <user port VLAN ID> gigabit <port>
one-to-one stacking <uplink VLAN ID> ctag-replaced <c-tag VLAN ID>
<c-tag PRIO ID> {priority-reserved | priority-replaced <PRIO ID>}
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for
GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
PVC number
<pvc>
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<user port VLAN ID> ADSL port VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<uplink VLAN ID>
Gigabit uplink port VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<PRIO ID>
Replaced the priority level of packets
out through the uplink port with the
- 285 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
specified value.
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.4.128 vlan-translation <port>/<pvc> <VLAN ID> gigabit <port> many-to-one
Description Set many-to-one VLAN translation
Syntax
vlan-translation <port>/<pvc> <user port VLAN ID> gigabit <port>
many- to-one replaced <uplink VLAN ID> {priority-reserved |
priority-replaced <PRIO ID>}
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for
GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<user port VLAN ID> ADSL port VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<uplink VLAN ID>
<PRIO ID>
Gigabit uplink port VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Replaced the priority level of packets
out through the uplink port with the
specified value.
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 286 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.4.129 vlan-translation <port>/<pvc> <VLAN ID> disable
Description Delete the specified entry from the VLAN translation table.
Syntax
vlan-translation <port>/<pvc> <VLAN ID> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
ADSL Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<VLAN ID>
ADSL port VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 287 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.5 Ethernet Interface Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Ethernet Interface execution
mode.
5.5.1 bridge
Description Enter bridge configuration mode / Set bridge port to default status
Syntax
bridge [default]
None
Parameter
5.5.2 gbe admin
Description Set Gigabit Ethernet administrative status (ON/OFF)
Syntax
gbe admin {on | off}
None
Parameter
5.5.3 gbe speed
Description Set Gigabit ethernet speed to auto-negotiate, 100Mbps half
duplexing, or 100Mbps full duplexing
Syntax
gbe speed {auto | half_100mbps | full_100mbps }
None
Parameter
- 288 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.6 Interface Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Interface execution mode.
5.6.1 bridge
Description Enter ATM-bridge configuration mode / Disable bridge port
Syntax
bridge <bridge id> [disable]
Parameter
Name
Description
bridge id
Bridge number.
Valid values: 1-8
Default value: 1
Type: Mandatory
5.6.2 adsl-config
Description Enter adsl configuration mode
Syntax
adsl-config
None
Parameter
5.6.3 ipoa
Description Enter IPoA (RFC 2684) routed mode
Syntax
ipoa
Parameter
None
- 289 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7 ATM Bridge Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the ATM Bridge execution mode.
5.7.1 accfrm
Description Set acceptable frame type (untagged only, tagged only, or all)
Syntax
accfrm {all | tag | untag}
None
Parameter
5.7.2 accounting disable
Description Disable accounting after authentication
Syntax
accounting disable
None
Parameter
5.7.3 accounting enable
Description Enable accounting after authentication
Syntax
accounting disable
None
Parameter
5.7.4 auth disable
Description Disable port authentication
Syntax
auth disable
None
Parameter
5.7.5 auth enable
Description Enable port authentication
Syntax
auth enable
None
Parameter
- 290 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.6 auth-sever-timeout
Description 802.1x Timeout for Radius Retries
Syntax
auth-server-timeout <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Timeout for Radius Retries
Valid values: 1 ~ 65534
Default value: 60
Type: Mandatory
5.7.7 auth-supp-timeout
Description 802.1x Timeout for requesting the supplicant to retry
Syntax
auth-supp-timeout <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Timeout for Supplicant retries
Valid values: 1 ~ 65534
Default value: 60
Type: Mandatory
5.7.8 auth-tx-period
Description 802.1x Timeout for Supplicant Re-transmissions before sending the
request
Syntax
auth-tx-period <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Timeout for Supplicant Re-transmissions
Valid values: 1 ~ 65534
Default value: 60
Type: Mandatory
- 291 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.9 default vlan
Description Set default VLAN ID for a bridge port
Syntax
default vlan <VLAN ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: 1
Type: Mandatory
5.7.10 default prio
Description Set default priority value for a bridge port
Syntax
default prio <prio ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<prio ID>
Priority ID
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.7.11 dhcp-relay
Description Enable/disable DHCP relay, or Set circuit ID/remote ID for identifying
the subscriber
Syntax
dhcp-relay {trusted | untrusted | circuit <circuit ID> | remote <remote
ID>}
Parameter
Name
Description
<circuit ID>
Circuit ID
Valid values: string type (max length 48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<remote ID
Remote ID
Valid values: string type (max length 48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 292 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.12 egress
Description Default PVID egress taged/untagged setting
Syntax
egress {tag | untag}
None
Parameter
5.7.13 force priority
Description Force priority setting (disabled: reserve the original priority of all
packets. egress: force the priority value of all packets sent out from
this bridge port’s default VLAN to be the default VLAN priority, so this
rule only works on default VLAN of this bridge port. ingress: force
applying the default VLAN priority value to all the packets received on
this bridge port (so this rule will work on all the member-set of this
bridge port). both: combine the rules of Ingress and Egress.
Syntax
force priority {disable | engress | ingress | both}
None
Parameter
5.7.14 igmp-acl bind
Description IGMP ACL (Access Control List) binding profile configuration
Syntax
igmp-acl bind {<number> [on] | on | off | reset}
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
IGMP ACL profile index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 15
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.7.15 igmp-acl max-group
Description Per port limit IGMP join group number
Syntax
igmp-acl max-group <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
IGMP ACL profile index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 128
Default value: 8
Type: Mandatory
- 293 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.16 ingress
Description Enable/disable ingress filter mode
Syntax
Parameter
ingress {enable | disable}
None
5.7.17 interim-interval
Description 802.1x Timeout for Accounting Information Update
Syntax
interim-interval <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Timeout for Accounting Information Updated.
Valid values: 60 ~ 600
Default value: 300
Type: Mandatory
5.7.18 ip-allowed
Description Enable/disable IP allowed function (user can specify allowed source
IP address per bridge port)
Syntax
ip-allowed {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.7.19 isolation
Description Enable/Disable default PVID isolation setting
Syntax
isolation [disable]
None
Parameter
5.7.20 mac-learning
Description Enable/disable MAC learning ability of a bridge port
Syntax
max-learning {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
- 294 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.21 max-reauth-req
Description 802.1x Max No. of Retries to supplicant (sending requests to the
authentication server if no response is received)
Syntax
max-reauth-req <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Max number of retries.
Valid values: 1~ 10
Default value: 2
Type: Mandatory
5.7.22 max-req
Description 802.1x Max No. of Retries to supplicant for EAP-Request frames of
types other than EAP-Request / Identity
Syntax
max-req <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Max number of retries.
Valid values: 1~ 10
Default value: 2
Type: Mandatory
5.7.23 max-mac
Description Set the maximum users allowed to access Internet based on user
MAC address counter on per ATM PVC basis
Syntax
max-mac <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Maximum number of the MAC addresses
Valid values: 1 ~ 128
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
- 295 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.24 port-control auto
Description Auto (default)
Syntax
Set to the system default authentication state for the port
none
Parameter
5.7.25 port-control force-authorized
Description Force this port authorized state
Syntax
port-control force-authorized
none
Parameter
5.7.26 port-control force-unauthorized
Description Force this port unauthorized state
Syntax
port-control force-unauthorized
none
Parameter
5.7.27 priority-regen
Description VLAN priority value regeneration or Delete VLAN priority tag filter
Syntax
priority-regen incoming <incoming prio> {outgoing <outgoing prio> |
disable}
Parameter
Name
Description
<incoming
prio>
Incoming VLAN priority value
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<outgoing prio> Outgoing VLAN priority value
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.7.28 protocol-base
Description Enable/disable protocol-based VLAN
Syntax
protocol-base {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
- 296 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.29 pvc
Description Set VPI and VCI
Syntax
pvc <VPI>/<VCI>
Parameter
Name
Description
<VPI>
Virtual Path Identifier.
Valid values: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
<VCI>
Virtual Channel Identifier.
Valid values: 21, 32~65535
Default value: 35
Type: Mandatory
5.7.30 pvc atmdesc
Description List ATM traffic descriptor
Syntax pvc atmdesc
Parameter
None
5.7.31 pvc atmdesc plc
Description Set ATM police (Rx) descriptor
Syntax
pvc atmdesc plc <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
ATM descriptor number.
Valid values: Enter ‘pvc atmdesc’ command
to see the descriptor list.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 297 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.32 pvc atmdesc shp
Description Set ATM shaped (Tx) descriptor
Syntax
pvc atmdesc shp <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
ATM descriptor number.
Valid values: Enter ‘pvc atmdesc’ command
to see the descriptor list.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.7.33 pvc encapsulation
Description Set Encapsulation type
Syntax
pvc encapsulation {llc | vcmux | auto}
None
Parameter
Note: The IDL-2402 supports auto-detection of the ATM AAL5 encapsulation
method, LLC or VC-Mux. Meanwhile, the IDL-2402 is also able to automatically
sense the following protocol encapsulations: PPPoE over ATM (per RFC 2684),
IPoE over ATM bridge mode, and PPP over ATM. IPoA works on individual PVC.
However, there are limitations on auto-detection of encapsulations:
1. LLC/VC-Mux automatically detection is only applicable to PVC#1 ~ PVC#4 of
each ADSL port. PVC#5 ~ PVC#8 must be assigned the ATM AAL5
encapsulation method manually.
2. PPPoA works only for PVC#1 ~ PVC#4.
Refer to section 5.11 for IPoA configuration commands.
5.7.34 quiet-period
Description 802.1x Quiet Period in Seconds (The period that 802.1x system stay
in the quiet state)
Syntax
quiet-period <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Timeout for quiet period.
- 298 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: 1~ 65534.
Default value: 60
Type: Mandatory
5.7.35 reauthentication disable
Description Disable Reauthentication for this port
Syntax
reauthentication disable
none
Parameter
5.7.36 reauthentication enable
Description Enable Reauthentication for this port
Syntax
reauthentication enable
none
Parameter
5.7.37 reauth-period
Description 802.1x Time after which an automatic re-authentication should be
initiated
Syntax
reauth-period <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Re-authentication period.
Valid values: 1~ 65534.
Default value: 3600
Type: Mandatory
5.7.38 stack
Description Enable/disable VLAN stacking
Syntax
stack {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.7.39 stack tls port enable
Description Enable VLAN stack TLS (transparent LAN service) port
Syntax
stack tls port {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
- 299 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.40 tcm-policer
Description Bind/Unbind Three Color Marking (TCM) Policer profile
Syntax
tcm-policer <number> {bind | unbind}
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
TCM policer profile index.
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.7.41 vlan <VLAN ID> disable
Description Delete a VLAN from memberset table
Syntax vlan <VLAN ID> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.7.42 vlan <VLAN ID> list
Description Show memberset setting by VLAN
Syntax
vlan <VLAN ID> list
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 300 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.7.43 vlan <VLAN ID> priority
Description Set VLAN memberset priority (specify priority level or reserved the
original priority, tag or untag, enable or disable port isolation)
Syntax
vlan <VLAN ID> priority {<prio ID> | reserved} {tag | untag} isolation
[disable]
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority ID
<prio ID>
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.7.44 vlan list
Description Show memberset setting by VLAN
Syntax
vlan list
None
Parameter
- 301 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.8 GBE Bridge Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the GBE Bridge execution mode.
5.8.1 accfrm
Description Set acceptable frame type (untagged only, tagged only, or all)
Syntax
accfrm {all | tag | untag}
None
Parameter
5.8.2 default vlan
Description Set default VLAN ID for a bridge port
Syntax
default vlan <VLAN ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: 1
Type: Mandatory
5.8.3 default prio
Description Set default priority value for a bridge port
Syntax
default prio <prio ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<prio ID>
Priority ID
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.8.4 egress
Description Default PVID egress taged/untagged setting
Syntax
egress {tag | untag}
None
Parameter
- 302 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.8.5 ingress
Description Enable/disable ingress filter mode
Syntax
Parameter
ingress {enable | disable}
None
5.8.6 isolation
Description Enable/Disable default PVID isolation setting
Syntax
isolation [disable]
None
Parameter
5.8.7 link mode
Description Set link mode (uplink mode or user mode)
Syntax
link mode {uplink | user}
None
Parameter
5.8.8 max-mac
Description Set the maximum users allowed to access Internet based on user
MAC address counter on per ATM PVC basis
Syntax
max-mac <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Maximum number of the MAC addresses
Valid values: 1 ~ 4096 for GBE interface, 1 ~
128 for ADSL interface.
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.8.9 priority-regen
Description VLAN priority value regeneration or Delete VLAN priority tag filter
Syntax
priority-regen incoming <incoming prio> {outgoing <outgoing prio> |
disable}
Parameter
Name
Description
<incoming
prio>
Incoming VLAN priority value
- 303 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<outgoing prio> Outgoing VLAN priority value
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.8.10 stack
Description Enable/disable VLAN stacking
Syntax
stack {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.8.11 tcm-policer
Description Bind/Unbind Three Color Marking (TCM) Policer profile
Syntax
tcm-policer <number> {bind | unbind}
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
TCM policer profile index.
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.8.12 vlan <VLAN ID> disable
Description Delete a VLAN from memberset table
Syntax
vlan <VLAN ID> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 304 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.8.13 vlan <VLAN ID> list
Description Show memberset setting by VLAN
Syntax
vlan <VLAN ID> list
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.8.14 vlan <VLAN ID> priority
Description Set VLAN memberset priority (specify priority level or reserved the
original priority, tag or untag, enable or disable port isolation)
Syntax
vlan <VLAN ID> priority {<prio ID> | reserved} {tag | untag} isolation
[disable]
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority ID
<prio ID>
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.8.15 vlan list
Description Show memberset setting by VLAN
Syntax
vlan list
None
Parameter
- 305 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.9 GBE-LA Bridge Mode Commands
5.9.1 accfrm
Description Set acceptable frame type (untagged only, tagged only, or all)
Syntax
accfrm {all | tag | untag}
None
Parameter
5.9.2 default vlan
Description Set default VLAN ID for a bridge port
Syntax
default vlan <VLAN ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: 1
Type: Mandatory
5.9.3 default prio
Description Set default priority value for a bridge port
Syntax
default prio <prio ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<prio ID>
Priority ID
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.9.4 egress
Description Default PVID egress taged/untagged setting
Syntax
egress {tag | untag}
None
Parameter
- 306 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.9.5 ingress
Description Enable/disable ingress filter mode
Syntax
Parameter
ingress {enable | disable}
None
5.9.6 isolation
Description Enable/Disable default PVID isolation setting
Syntax
isolation [disable]
None
Parameter
5.9.7 link mode
Description Set link mode (uplink mode or user mode)
Syntax
link mode {uplink | user}
None
Parameter
5.9.8 max-mac
Description Set the maximum users allowed to access Internet based on user
MAC address counter on per ATM PVC basis
Syntax
max-mac <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Maximum number of the MAC addresses
Valid values: 1 ~ 4096
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.9.9 priority-regen
Description VLAN priority value regeneration or Delete VLAN priority tag filter
Syntax
priority-regen incoming <incoming prio> {outgoing <outgoing prio> |
disable}
Parameter
Name
Description
<incoming
prio>
Incoming VLAN priority value
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
- 307 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<outgoing prio> Outgoing VLAN priority value
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.9.10 stack
Description Enable/disable VLAN stacking
Syntax
stack {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.9.11 tcm-policer
Description Bind/Unbind Three Color Marking (TCM) Policer profile
Syntax
tcm-policer <number> {bind | unbind}
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
TCM policer profile index.
Valid values: 1~24(48)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.9.12 vlan <VLAN ID> disable
Description Delete a VLAN from memberset table
Syntax
vlan <VLAN ID> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 308 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.9.13 vlan <VLAN ID> list
Description Show memberset setting by VLAN
Syntax
vlan <VLAN ID> list
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.9.14 vlan <VLAN ID> priority
Description Set VLAN memberset priority (specify priority level or reserved the
original priority, tag or untag, enable or disable port isolation)
Syntax
vlan <VLAN ID> priority {<prio ID> | reserved} {tag | untag} isolation
[disable]
Parameter
Name
Description
VLAN ID
VLAN ID.
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority ID
<prio ID>
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
5.9.15 vlan list
Description Show memberset setting by VLAN
Syntax
vlan list
None
Parameter
- 309 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.10 ADSL Configure Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the ADSL Config mode.
5.10.1 line mode carrier
Description Set/Clear xDSL line carrier
Syntax
line mode carrier {on | off | oninit}
None
Parameter
5.10.2 line mode diagnostic
Description Set/Clear xDSL line diagnostics
Syntax
line mode diagnostic {init | off}
None
Parameter
5.10.3 line mode force-l3
Description Set force to power management L3 mode or not
Syntax
line mode force-l3 {on | off}
None
Parameter
5.10.4 line mode mask
Description Set/Clear xDSL line Operational mode mask
Syntax
line mode mask {set | clear } <opmode ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<opmode id>
The ID of allowed ADSL modes of operation.
Valid values: Use ‘list opmode’ command to
see all the operation modes. Or refer to Table
A-1.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 310 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.10.5 line port
Description Set xDSL line port information
Syntax
line port {id <id> | description <desc> | phone <phone number>}
Parameter
Name
Description
<id>
Line ID name (max 32 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<desc>
Line port description (max 48 character)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<phone
Phone number. (max 32 characters)
Valid values: no limit format
Default value: -
number>
Type: Mandatory
5.10.6 line profile
Description Create xDSL line profile
Syntax
line profile {service | spectrum | tca} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Profile index.
Valid values: 1~120 (1~64 for tca profile)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.10.7 line status service
Description Set xDSL line service status (service ON/OFF/RESET)
Syntax
line status service {on | off | reset}
None
Parameter
- 311 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.11 IPoA Configure Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the IPoA configure mode.
5.11.1 brasmac
Description Display Broadband RAS MAC address by index
Syntax
brasmac <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Broadband RAS MAC Table Index
Valid values: 1 ~ 48
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.11.2 brasmac list
Description Show Broadband RAS MAC address table
Syntax
brasmac list
None
Parameter
5.11.3 cpriority
Description Customer VLAN Priority setting
Syntax
cpriority <prio ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<prio ID>
Customer VLAN Priority value
Valid values: 0 ~ 7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 312 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.11.4 cvlan
Description Customer VLAN setting
Syntax
cvlan <VLAN ID>
Parameter
Name
Description
<prio ID>
Customer VLAN ID number
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.11.5 ipoa-status
Description IPoA Status setting (enable/disable IPoA)
Syntax
ipoa-status {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.11.6 max-mac
Description Port based allowed maximum number of MAC addresses
Syntax
max-mac <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Number of MAC addresses
Valid values: 1 ~ 128
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.11.7 pvc
Description Set VPI and VCI
Syntax
pvc <VPI>/<VCI>
Parameter
Name
Description
<VPI>
Virtual Path Identifier.
Valid values: 0 ~ 255
Default value: 0
Type: Mandatory
- 313 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<VCI>
Virtual Channel Identifier.
Valid values: 21, 32~65535
Default value: 35
Type: Mandatory
5.11.8 pvc atmdesc
Description List ATM traffic descriptor
Syntax
pvc atmdesc
None
Parameter
5.11.9 pvc atmdesc plc
Description Set ATM police (Rx) descriptor
Syntax
pvc atmdesc plc <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
ATM descriptor number.
Valid values: Enter ‘pvc atmdesc’ command
to see the descriptor list.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.11.10 pvc atmdesc shp
Description Set ATM shaped (Tx) descriptor
Syntax
pvc atmdesc shp <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
ATM descriptor number.
Valid values: Enter ‘pvc atmdesc’ command
to see the descriptor list.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 314 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.11.11 pvc encapsulation
Description Set Encapsulation type
Syntax
pvc encapsulation {llc | vcmux}
None
Parameter
5.11.12 uplink gigabit
Description Set GBE uplink mode
Syntax
uplink <port>
Parameter
Name
Description
<port>
Gigabit Ethernet port number.
Valid values: 1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 315 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.12 Access List Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the ACL execution mode.
5.12.1 bcrate cir
Description Broadcast rate limiting CIR and LBS setting
Syntax
bcrate cir <cir> lbs <lbs>
Parameter
Name
Description
<cir>
Committed Information Rate (bps)
Valid values: 1536 ~ 1000000000
Default value: 80000
Type: Mandatory
<lbs>
Leakage Bucket Size (millisecond)
Valid values: 1 ~ 1024
Default value: 80
Type: Mandatory
5.12.2 bcrate list
Description Show broadcast rate limiting list
Syntax
bcrate list
None
Parameter
5.12.3 dstmac
Description Specify destination MAC address of packets to filter / Show specified
destination MAC deny access list entry / Delete specified destination
MAC deny access list entry
Syntax
dstmac <number> deny {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>} mac
<mac address>
dstmac <number> list
dstmac <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Destination MAC deny access list number
- 316 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
<port>
<pvc>
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<mac address> Destination MAC address
Valid values: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (xx:00~ff)
Default value: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Type: Mandatory
5.12.4 dstmac list
Description Display destination MAC deny access list
Syntax
dstmac list
None
Parameter
5.12.5 dstip
Description Specify destination IP address of packets to filter / Show specified
destination IP deny access list entry / Delete specified destination IP
deny access list entry
Syntax
dstip <number> deny {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>} ip <ipv4
address> <netmask>
dstip <number> list
dstip <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Destination IP deny access list number
Valid values: 1~256
- 317 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
<port>
<pvc>
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ipv4 address> Destination IP address
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
Subnet mask
<netmask>
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.12.6 dstip list
Description Display destination IP deny access list
Syntax
dstip list
None
Parameter
5.12.7 ethertype
Description Specify Ether Type of packets to filter / Show specified Ether Type
deny access list entry / Delete specified Ether Type deny access list
entry
Syntax
ethertype <number> deny {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>} type
<ethertype>
ethertype <number> list
ethertype <number> disable
Parameter
- 318 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Name
Description
<number>
Ether Type deny access list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
<port>
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ethertype>
Ether Type value
Valid values: 0x0001 ~ 0xffff
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.12.8 ethertype list
Description Display Ether Type deny access list
Syntax
ethertype list
None
Parameter
5.12.9 ip-allowed
Description Specify allowed source IP adderss of packets to filter / Show allowed
IP access list entry / Delete specified allowed IP from access list
Syntax
ip-allowed <number> allow xdsl <port>/<pvc> srcip <ipv4 address>
vlan <VLAN ID>
ip-allowed <number> list
ip-allwowed <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Static IP allow access list number
- 319 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
<port>
<pvc>
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ipv4 address> Allowed source IP address
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
<VLAN ID>
IP Allowed entry VLAN ID number
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.12.10 ip-allowed list
Description Display static IP allow access list
Syntax
ip-allowed list
None
Parameter
5.12.11 ipprotocol
Description Specify IP Protocol of packets to reject / Show specify IP protocol
access list entry / Delete specify IP protocol deny access list entry
Syntax ipprotocol <number> deny {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>}
protocol <protocol>
ipprotocol <number> list
ipprotocol <number> disable
Parameter
- 320 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Name
Description
<number>
IP Protocol deny access list number
Valid values: 1-256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
<port>
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
protocol
Input protocol name.
Valid values:
icmp
<1>
(ICMP) Internet Control Message
igmp
(IGMP) Internet Group
Management <2>
ipinip
tcp
IP in IP (encapsulation) <4>
(TCP) Transmission Control <6>
(GRP) Globin Reduction Protocol
grp
<7>
igp
(IGP) Any private interior gateway
<9>
udp
gre
(UDP) User Datagram <17>
(GRE) General Routing
Encapsulation <47>
eigrp
ospf
EIGRP <88>
OSPF <89>
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 321 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.12.12 ipprotocol list
Description Display IP protocol deny access list
Syntax
ipprotocol list
None
Parameter
5.12.13 l4dstport
Description Specify L4 dest port of packets to reject / Show specify L4 dest port
access list entry / Delete specify L4 dest port deny access list entry
Syntax l4dstport <number> deny {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>} port
<port number>
l4dstport <number> list
l4dstport <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
L4 dest port deny access list number
Valid values: 1-256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
<port>
<pvc>
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<port number> L4 destination port number
Valid values: 1-65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 322 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.12.14 l4dstport list
Description Display L4 dest port deny access list
Syntax
l4dstport list
None
Parameter
5.12.15 mcfldrate list
Description Display flooding rate limiting list
Syntax
mcfldrate list
None
Parameter
5.12.16 mcfldrate vlan
Description Display flooding rate limiting list
Syntax
mcfldrate vlan <VLAN ID> {list | disable | cir <cir> lbs <lbs>}
Parameter
Name
Description
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<cir>
<lbs>
Committed Information Rate (bps)
Valid values: 1536 ~ 1000000000
Default value: 80000
Type: Mandatory
Leakage Bucket Size (millisecond)
Valid values: 1 ~ 1024
Default value: 80
Type: Mandatory
5.12.17 srcip
Description Specify source IP address of packets to filter / Show specify source IP
deny access list entry / Delete specify source IP deny access list
entry
Syntax srcip <number> deny {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>} ip <ipv4
address> <net mask>
- 323 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
srcip <number> list
srcip <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Source IP deny access list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
<port>
<pvc>
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ipv4 address> Destination IP address
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
Subnet mask
<netmask>
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0~255)
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.12.18 srcip list
Description Display source IP deny access list
Syntax
srcip list
None
Parameter
- 324 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.12.19 srcmac
Description Specify source MAC of packets to reject / Show specify source MAC
deny access list entry / Delete specify source MAC deny access list
entry
Syntax srcmac <number> deny {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>} mac
<mac address>
srcmac <number> list
srcmac <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Source MAC deny access list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
<port>
<pvc>
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<mac address> MAC address
Valid values: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (xx:00~ff)
Default value: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Type: Mandatory
5.12.20 srcmac list
Description Display source MAC deny access list
Syntax
srcmac list
None
Parameter
- 325 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.13 ATM Description Mode Commands
5.13.1 cbr
Description CBR traffic setting
Syntax
cbr <index> pcr <pcr> cdvt <cdvt>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<cdvt>
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.13.2 no atmdesc
Description Delete ATM Description
Syntax
no atmdesc <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
ATM Description number
Valid values: 1~251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 326 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.13.3 ubr1
Description UBR type 1 traffic setting (atmNoClpNoScrCdvt)
Syntax ubr1 <index> pcr <pcr> cdvt <cdvt>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<cdvt>
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.13.4 ubr2
Description UBR type 2 traffic setting (atmNoClpTaggingNoScr)
Syntax
ubr2 <index> pcr <pcr> cdvt <cdvt>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<cdvt>
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
- 327 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.13.5 unshp
Description unshaped traffic setting (atmNoTrafficDescriptor)
Syntax
unshp <index>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.13.6 vbr1
Description VBR type 1 traffic setting (atmNoClpScrCdvt)
Syntax
vbr1 <index> pcr <pcr> cdvt <cdvt> scr <scr> mbs <mbs>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
<cdvt>
<scr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Sustained Cell Rate
- 328 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<mbs>
Maximum Burst Size
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.13.7 vbr2
Description VBR type 2 traffic setting (atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt)
Syntax
vbr2 <index> pcr <pcr> cdvt <cdvt> scr <scr> mbs <mbs>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
<cdvt>
<scr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Sustained Cell Rate
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<mbs>
Maximum Burst Size
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 329 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.13.8 vbr3
Description VBR type 3 traffic setting (atmClpTaggingScrCdvt)
Syntax vbr3 <index> pcr <pcr> cdvt <cdvt> scr <scr> mbs <mbs>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
<cdvt>
<scr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Sustained Cell Rate
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<mbs>
Maximum Burst Size
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 330 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.13.9 ubr-shp
Description UBR shaped traffic setting (atmNoClpNoScr)
Syntax ubr-shp <index> pcr <pcr>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.13.10 cbr-shp
Description CBR shaped traffic setting (atmClpTransparentNoScr)
Syntax
cbr-shp <index> pcr <pcr> cdvt <cdvt>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<cdvt>
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 331 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.13.11 vbr-shp
Description VBR shaped traffic setting (atmClpTransparentScr)
Syntax vbr-shp <index> pcr <pcr> cdvt <cdvt> scr <scr> mbs <mbs>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
<cdvt>
<scr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Sustained Cell Rate
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<mbs>
Maximum Burst Size
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 332 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.13.12 vbrnrt
Description VBR-nrt shaped traffic setting (atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt)
Syntax vbr-shp <index> pcr <pcr> cdvt <cdvt> scr <scr> mbs <mbs>
Parameter
Name
Description
<index>
ATM Descriptor index
Valid values: 1 ~ 251
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pcr>
<cdvt>
<scr>
Peak cell rate number
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Cell Delay Variation Tolerance
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Sustained Cell Rate
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<mbs>
Maximum Burst Size
Valid values: 0 ~ 65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 333 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.14 Priority List Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Priority List execution mode.
5.14.1 ds
Description Set Differentiated Service of packets to remark VLAN priority / Show
Differentiated Service priority list entry / Disable Differentiated
Service priority list entry
Syntax
ds <number> prio <prio ID> {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>} dscp
<dscp>
ds <number> list
ds <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Differentiated Service priority list number.
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority value
<prio ID>
<port>
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Diffserv Code Points, which is a 6-bit number.
The standardized combinations are listed below:
default Default value (bits:000000)
<dscp>
af11
Assured Forwarding Class 1:Low Drop
(bits:001010)
- 334 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
af12
af13
af21
af22
af23
af31
af32
af33
af41
af42
af43
ef
Assured Forwarding Class 1:Medium Drop
(bits:001100)
Assured Forwarding Class 1:High Drop
(bits:001110)
Assured Forwarding Class 2:Low Drop
(bits:010010)
Assured Forwarding Class 2:Medium Drop
(bits:010100)
Assured Forwarding Class 2:High Drop
(bits:010110)
Assured Forwarding Class 3:Low Drop
(bits:011010)
Assured Forwarding Class 3:Medium Drop
(bits:011100)
Assured Forwarding Class 3:High Drop
(bits:011110)
Assured Forwarding Class 4:Low Drop
(bits:100010)
Assured Forwarding Class 4:Medium Drop
(bits:100100)
Assured Forwarding Class 4:High Drop
(bits:100110)
Expedited Forwarding (bits:101110)
5.14.2 ds list
Description Show Differentiated Service priority list
Syntax
ds list
None
Parameter
5.14.3 dstip
Description
Specify dest IP address of packets to remark vlan priority / Show
dest IP address priority list entry / Disable dest IP address priority list
entry
Syntax
dstip <number> prio <prio ID> {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>} ip
<ipv4 address> <netmask>
dstip <number> list
dstip <number> disable
- 335 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Destination IP address priority list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority value
<prio ID>
<port>
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ipv4 address> Destination IP address
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
(xxx:0~255)
(xxx:0~255)
<netmask>
Subnet mask
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.14.4 dstip list
Description Show destination IP address priority list
Syntax
dstip list
None
Parameter
- 336 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.14.5 dstmac
Description Specify dest MAC of packets to remark vlan priority / Show dest MAC
priority list entry / Disable dest MAC priority list entry
Syntax
dstmac <number> prio <prio ID> {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>}
mac <mac address>
dstmac <number> list
dstmac <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Destination MAC priority list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority value
<prio ID>
<port>
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<mac address> MAC address
Valid values: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (xx:0~ff)
Default value: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Type: Mandatory
- 337 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.14.6 dstmac list
Description Show destination MAC priority list
Syntax
dstmac list
None
Parameter
5.14.7 ethertype
Description Specify Ether Type of packets to remark vlan priority / Show Ether
Type priority list entry / Disable Ether Type priority list entry
Syntax ethertype <number> prio <prio ID> {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit
<port>} type <ethertype>
ethertype <number> list
ethertype <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
ToS (IP Precedence) priority list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<prio ID>
<port>
Priority value
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ethertype>
Ether Type value
Valid values: 0x0001 ~ 0xffff
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 338 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.14.8 ethertype list
Description Show Ether Type priority list
Syntax
ethertype list
None
Parameter
5.14.9 ipprotocol
Description Specify IP protocol of packets to remark vlan priority / Show IP
protocol priority list entry / Disable IP protocol priority list entry
Syntax ipprotocol <number> prio <prio ID> {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit
<port>}
} protocol <protocol>
ipprotocol <number> list
ipprotocol <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
ToS (IP Precedence) priority list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority value
<prio ID>
<port>
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
protocol
Input protocol name.
Valid values:
- 339 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
icmp
<1>
(ICMP) Internet Control Message
(IGMP) Internet Group
igmp
Management <2>
ipinip
tcp
IP in IP (encapsulation) <4>
(TCP) Transmission Control <6>
(GRP) Globin Reduction Protocol
grp
<7>
igp
(IGP) Any private interior gateway
<9>
udp
(UDP) User Datagram <17>
(GRE) General Routing
gre
Encapsulation <47>
eigrp
ospf
EIGRP <88>
OSPF <89>
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.14.10 ipprotocol list
Description Show IP protocol priority list
Syntax
ipprotocol list
None
Parameter
5.14.11 srcip
Description Specify source IP address of packets to remark vlan priority
Syntax srcip <number> prio <prio ID> {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>} ip
<ipv4 address> <netmask>
srcip <number> list
scrip <number> disable
- 340 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Source IP address priority list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority value
<prio ID>
<port>
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ipv4 address> Destination IP address
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
(xxx:0~255)
(xxx:0~255)
<netmask>
Subnet mask
Valid values: xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
Default value: -
Type: Optional
5.14.12 srcip list
Description Show source IP address priority list
Syntax
srcip list
None
Parameter
- 341 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.14.13 srcmac
Description Specify source MAC of packets to remark vlan priority
Syntax srcmac <number> prio <prio ID> {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>}
mac <mac address>
scrmac <number> list
scrmac <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Source mac priority list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority value
<prio ID>
<port>
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<mac address> MAC address
Valid values: xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx (xx:0~ff)
Default value: 00:00:00:00:00:00
Type: Mandatory
5.14.14 srcmac list
Description Show source MAC priority list
Syntax
srcmac list
None
Parameter
- 342 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.14.15 tos
Description Specify ToS (IP Precedence) of packets to remark vlan priority / Show
ToS (IP Precedence) priority list entry / Disable ToS (IP Precedence)
priority list entry
Syntax tos <number> prio <prio ID> {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>}
precedence <tos>
tos <number> list
tos <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
ToS (IP Precedence) priority list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Priority value
<prio ID>
<port>
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
<tos>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Incoming Type of Service.
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 343 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.14.16 tos list
Description Show ToS (IP Precedence) priority list
Syntax
Parameter
tos list
None
5.14.17 vlanid
Description Specify VLAN ID of packets to remark VLAN priority / Show VLAN id
priority list entry / Disable VLAN id priority list entry
Syntax vlanid <number> prio <prio ID> {xdsl <port>/<pvc> | gigabit <port>}
vlan <VLAN ID>
vlanid <number> list
vlanid <number> disable
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Vlan id priority list number
Valid values: 1~256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<prio ID>
<port>
Priority value
Valid values: 0~7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Port number.
Valid values: 1~24(48) for xDSL, 1 for GBE
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<pvc>
PVC number
Valid values: 1 ~ 8
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<VLAN ID>
VLAN ID number
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 344 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.15 Alarm Profile Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Alarm Profile execution mode.
5.15.1 alarm mask
Description Mask the alarm
Syntax
alarm mask <name>
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
Name of alarm.
Valid values: Refer to Appendix B Alarm
Table.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.15.2 alarm unmask
Description Unmask the alarm
Syntax
alarm unmask <name>
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
Name of alarm.
Valid values: Refer to Appendix B Alarm
Table.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.15.3 alarm major
Description Set the level of the alarm to Major
Syntax
alarm major <name>
Parameter
Name
Description
<name>
Name of alarm.
Valid values: Refer to Appendix B Alarm
Table.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 346 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.16 IGMP-ACL Profile Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the IGMP-ACL Profile execution
mode.
5.16.1 igmp-acl
Description IGMP group ACL Setting (IP and VLAN) / Delete channel setting
Syntax
igmp-acl <number> {<ipv4 address> vlan <VLAN ID> | delete}
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
IGMP ACL channel index.
Valid values: 1 ~ 256
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<ipv4 address> IGMP group address
Valid values: 224.0.0.0 ~ 239.255.255.255
The range of addresses from 224.0.0.0 to
224.0.0.255 is reserved for the use of
routing protocols and other low-level
topology discovery or maintenance
protocols.
Default value: 0.0.0.0
Type: Mandatory
VLAN ID.
<VLAN ID>
Valid values: 1 ~ 4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.16.2 igmp-acl rebind
Description IGMP ACL Profile rebind
Syntax
igmp-acl rebind
None
Parameter
- 348 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.17 Rate Limit Profile Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Rate Limit Profile execution
mode.
5.17.1 share-slb
Description Set share SLB (Single Leaky Bucket) / Delete the share SLB profile
Syntax
share-slb <number> {cir <cir> lbs <lbs> | disable}
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Share SLB profile index
Valid values: 1 ~ 48
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<cir>
<lbs>
Committed Information Rate (bps)
Valid values: 1536 ~ 1000000000
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Leakage Bucket Size (bits)
Valid values: 1 ~ 1024
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.17.2 share-dlb
Description Set share DLB (Dual Leaky Bucket) / Delete the share DLB profile
Syntax
share-dlb <number> {cir <cir> lbs <lbs> eir <eir> lbs <lbs> | disable}
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Share DLB profile index
Valid values: 1 ~ 48
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<cir>
Committed Information Rate (bps)
Valid values: 1536 ~ 1000000000
- 349 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<lbs>
<eir>
<lbs>
First Leakage Bucket Size (bits)
Valid values: 1 ~ 1024
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Excess Info Rate (bps)
Valid values: 1536 ~ 1000000000
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Second Leakage Bucket Size (bits)
Valid values: 1 ~ 1024
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.17.3 non-share-slb
Description Set non-share SLB (Single Leaky Bucket) / Delete the non-share
SLB profile
Syntax
non-share-slb <number> {cir <cir> lbs <lbs> | disable}
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Share SLB profile index
Valid values: 1 ~ 48
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<cir>
<lbs>
Committed Information Rate (bps)
Valid values: 1536 ~ 1000000000
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Leakage Bucket Size (bits)
Valid values: 1 ~ 1024
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 350 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.17.4 non-share-dlb
Description Set non-share DLB (Dual Leaky Bucket) / Delete the non-share DLB
profile
Syntax
non-share-dlb <number> {cir <cir> lbs <lbs> eir <eir> lbs <lbs> |
disable}
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Share DLB profile index
Valid values: 1 ~ 48
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<cir>
<lbs>
<eir>
<lbs>
Committed Information Rate (bps)
Valid values: 1536 ~ 1000000000
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
First Leakage Bucket Size (bits)
Valid values: 1 ~ 1024
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Excess Info Rate (bps)
Valid values: 1536 ~ 1000000000
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Second Leakage Bucket Size (bits)
Valid values: 1 ~ 1024
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 351 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.18 Service Profile Configure Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Service Profile execution mode.
5.18.1 bitrate
Description Set downstream/upstream Minimum/Maximum/Planned/L2 minimum
bit rate
Syntax
bitrate {ds | us} {min | max | planned | l2} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Bit rate (kb/s).
Valid values: 0-65535
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.18.2 delay
Description Set downstream/upstream delay introduced by the interleaving
Syntax
delay {ds | us} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Delay time (ms).
Valid values: 1-63
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.18.3 l2-packet
Description Set L2 Packet cell
Syntax
l2-packet <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Set L2 Packet cell.
Valid values: 0 ~ 28
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 352 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.18.4 mode
Description Set downstream/upstream rate adaptive mode to init (rate
automatically selected at start up only and does not change after that),
dynamic (rate automatically selected at initialization and is
continuously adapted during show time), or manual (rate changed
manually)
Syntax
mode {ds | us} {init | dynamic | manual}
None
Parameter
5.18.5 noise
Description Set downstream/upstream minimum impulse noise protection.
Syntax
noise {ds | us} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Noise (tenth symbols).
Valid values: 0~8 step 0.1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.18.6 noisemargin
Description Set Downshift/Upshift Noise Margin in downstream/upstream
direction
Syntax
noisemargin {ds | us} {downshift | upshift} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Downshift/Upshift Noise Margin (tenth
symbols).
Valid values: 0~31 step 0.1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 353 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.18.7 ra-interval
Description Set Downshift/Upshift Interval in downstream/upstream direction
Syntax
ra-interval {ds | us} {downshift | upshift} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Downshift/Upshift interval (seconds).
Valid values: 0 ~ 16383
Default value: 10
Type: Mandatory
5.18.8 service name
Description Set service profile name
Syntax
service name <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<string>
Profile name. (max 31 characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 354 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.19 Spectrum Profile Configure Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Spectrum Profile execution
mode.
5.19.1 aggregate
Description Set downstream/upstream aggregate power level
Syntax
aggregate {ds | us} max powerlevel <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Power level (tenth dBm).
Valid values: 0~25.5 step 0.1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.19.2 bands <index> {start | stop}
Description Set RF bands
Syntax
bands <index> {start | stop} <value>
Parameter
Name
Description
index
Bands array index.
Valid values: 0-7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Set start / stop frequency (kHz).
Valid values: 0-12000
Default value: -
value
Type: Mandatory
5.19.3 bands <index> mask
Description Set bands mask
Syntax
bands <index> mask <value>
- 355 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Parameter
Name
Description
index
Bands array index.
Valid values: 0-7
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
value
Valid values: see the following:
egress_no_control
egress_notched
ingress_low
egress no control
egress notched
ingress low
ingress_weak
ingress_strong
rf_signal_am
ingress weak
ingress strong
RF Signal AM Type
RF Signal HAMBAND
rf_signal_hamband
Type
Default value: egress_no_control
Type: Mandatory
5.19.4 carriermask
Description Set carrier mask
Syntax
carriermask {ds | us} <index> <value>
Parameter
Name
Description
index
Carrier mask array index.
Valid values: 0-63
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
<value>
Carrier mask array value.
Valid values: 0x00~0xff (Hex)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 356 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.19.5 message-based
Description Set minimum DS/US message-based data rate that is needed by
ATU
Syntax
message-based {ds | us} min <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Min downstream/upstream message-based
data rate.
Valid values: 4 ~ 28 kbps
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.19.6 modem features
Description Set modem features enable/disable
Syntax
modem features {enable | disable}
None
Parameter
5.19.7 noisemargin
Description Set downstream/upstream maximum / minimum / target noise margin
Syntax noisemargin {ds | us} {max | min | target} <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Noise margin value.
Valid values: 0~31 (or 51.1 means no max
noise margin is used) step 0.1.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.19.8 opmode
Description Set Operational mode
Syntax
opmode {set | clear} <opmode id>
Parameter
Name
Description
opmode id
The ID of allowed ADSL modes of operation.
Valid values: Use ‘list opmode’ command to
- 357 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
see all the operation modes.
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.19.9 pbomode
Description Set power backoff operation mode ON/OFF
Syntax
pbomode us {on | off}
None
Parameter
5.19.10 power-mgt disable
Description Disable power management function for ADSL
Syntax
power-mgt disable
None
Parameter
5.19.11 power-mgt l2 enable
Description Allow autonomous L2 state entry/exit
Syntax
power-mgt l2 enable
None
Parameter
5.19.12 power-mgt l2_l3 enable
Description Allow autonomous L2 and L3 state entry/exit
Syntax
power-mgt l2_l3 enable
None
Parameter
5.19.13 power-mgt l0-time
Description Set the minimum time (in seconds) between Exit from L2 low power
state and the next Entry into the L2 low power state
Syntax
power-mgt l0-time <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
L0 Time value.
Valid values: 0 ~ 255 (sec)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 358 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.19.14 power-mgt l2-time
Description Set minimum time (in seconds) between an Entry into L2 low power
state and the first L2 low power trim request, and between two
consecutive L2 power trim requests
Syntax
power-mgt l2-time <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
L2 Time value.
Valid values: 0 ~ 255 (sec)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.19.15 power-mgt l2-atpr
Description Set maximum aggregate transmit power reduction (in dB) that is
allowed at transition of L0 to L2 state or an L2 low power trim request
Syntax
power-mgt l2-atpr <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
L2 power reduction range value.
Valid values: 0 ~ 31 (dB)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.19.16 power-mgt l2-atprt
Description Set total maximum aggregate transmit power reduction (in dB) that is
allowed in the L2 state; the total reduction is the sum of all reductions
of L2 Request (i.e., at transition of L0 to L2 state) and L2 power trims
Syntax
power-mgt l2-atprt <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
L2 total power reduction value.
Valid values: 0 ~ 31 (dB)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 359 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.19.17 psdlevel
Description Set PSD level
Syntax
psdlevel {ds | us} max <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Maximum PSD level (tenth dBm/Hz).
Valid values: -60 ~ -40 downstream step 0.1
-60 ~ -38 upstream. step 0.1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.19.18 psdshape
Description Set PSD shape
Syntax
psdshape ds {cut-off <number> | standard}
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Cut-off frequencies at carrier.
Valid values: 100-280 step 10
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.19.19 rxaggregate us max powerlevel
Description Set maximum aggregate receive power level
Syntax
rxaggregate us max powerlevel <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
<number>
Maximum aggregate receive power level
(-255~255 tenth dBm).
Valid values: -25.5~25.5 step 0.1
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 360 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.19.20spectrum name
Description Set spectrum profile name
Syntax
spectrum name <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
<string>
Name of the spectrum profile. (max 31
characters)
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.19.21 status modify complete
Description Set the status of modification
Syntax
status modify complete
None
Parameter
- 361 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.20 TCA Profile Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the TCA Profile execution mode.
5.20.1 adsl-tca day
Description Set threshold value for near-end/far-end day PM
Syntax
adsl-tca day {ne | fe} {es | ses | uas} <number
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Threshold value.
Valid values: 0-86400
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.20.2 adsl-tca disable
Description Disable TCA
Syntax
adsl-tca disable
None
Parameter
5.20.3 adsl-tca enable
Description Enable TCA
Syntax
adsl-tca enable
None
Parameter
5.20.4 adsl-tca interval
Description Set threshold value for near-end/far-end interval PM
Syntax adsl-tca interval {ne | fe} {es | ses | uas | lof | lol | los | errframe}
<number
Parameter
Name
Description
number
Threshold value.
Valid values: 0-900
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 362 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.21 Dot1x Mode Commands
The commands in this section can be executed only in the Dot1x execution mode.
5.21.1 auth-method
Description Set priorities of the different authentication methods
Syntax
auth-method <index> {none | radius_1 | radius_2 | radius_3 | profile}
Parameter
Name
Description
index
Authentication method priority.
Valid values: 1-4
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.21.2 server <number> ip
Description Set RADIUS Server IP address
Syntax
server <index> ip <ipv4 address>
Parameter
Name
Description
index
RADIUS Server index.
Valid values: 1-3
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
RADIUS Server IP address
Valid values: -
ipv4 address
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 363 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.21.3 server <number> auth-port
Description Set the port number for RADIUS Authentication in the Layer-4
header
Syntax
server <index> auth-port <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
index
RADIUS Server index.
Valid values: 1-3
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
number
RADIUS Server authentication port
Valid values: -
Default value: 1812
Type: Mandatory
5.21.4 server <number> acct-port
Description Set the port number for RADIUS Accounting in the Layer-4 header
Syntax
server <index> acct-port <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
index
RADIUS Server index.
Valid values: 1-3
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
RADIUS Server accounting port
Valid values: -
number
Default value: 1813
Type: Mandatory
- 364 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.21.5 server <number> max-fail
Description Set the maximum allowable times of continuously failed
authentication attempts
Syntax
server <index> max-fail <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
index
RADIUS Server index.
Valid values: 1-3
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
number
RADIUS Server maximum fail number
Valid values: 1-10
Default value: 2
Type: Mandatory
5.21.6 server <number> secret
Description Set the authentication key in text format
Syntax
server <index> secret <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
index
RADIUS Server index.
Valid values: 1-3
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
string
Secret ID checked between NAS and
RADIUS server
Valid values: max 16 character
Default value:
Type: Mandatory
- 365 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.21.7 server <index> vlan <number>
Description The VID of the VLAN which the RADIUS server belongs to
Syntax
server <index> vlan <number>
Parameter
Name
Description
index
RADIUS Server index
Valid values: 1-3
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
VLAN ID
number
Valid values: 1-4094
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.21.8 server <number> delete
Description Delete a RADIUS server setup in the system
Syntax
server <index> delete
Parameter
Name
Description
index
RADIUS Server index.
Valid values: 1-3
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
5.21.9 profile delete
Description Delete an authentication local profile in the system
Syntax
profile <index> delete
Parameter
Name
index
Description
Authenticate profile index.
Valid values: 1-64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 366 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.21.10 profile <index> username <string> password
Description Set the username and password for a authentication local profile
Syntax
profile <index> username <string> password <string>
Parameter
Name
Description
index
Authenticate profile index.
Valid values: 1-64
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
string
string
Setting username of Authenticate profile
Valid values: max 16 character
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
Setting password of Authenticate profile
Valid values: max 16 character
Default value: -
Type: Mandatory
- 367 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix A ADSL Operational Mask Table
Table A-1
ADSL Operational Mask
Bit
0
Description
ANSI_T1.413
Bit
Description
992_4_I_AllDigital_NonOverlapped
992_4_I_AllDigital_Overlapped
992_3_L_Pots_NonOverlapped_Mode1
992_3_L_Pots_NonOverlapped_Mode2
992_3_L_Pots_Overlapped_Mode3
992_3_L_Pots_Overlapped_Mode4
992_3_M_Pots_Extend_US_Overlapped
992_3_M_Pots_Extend_US_NonOverlapped
992_5_A_Pots_NonOverlapped
992_5_A_Pots_Overlapped
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
46
47
48
49
50
51
56
57
58
59
ETSI_DTS_TM06006
1
992_1_A_Pots_NonOverlapped
992_1_A_Pots_Overlapped
2
3
992_1_B_Isdn_NonOverlapped
992_1_B_Isdn_Overlapped
4
5
992_1_C_TcmIsdn_NonOverlapped
992_1_C_TcmIsdn_Overlapped
992_2_A_Pots_NonOverlapped
992_2_B_Pots_Overlapped
6
7
8
9
992_2_C_TcmIsdn_NonOverlapped
992_2_C_TcmIsdn_Overlapped
992_3_A_Pots_NonOverlapped
992_3_A_Pots_Overlapped
992_5_B_Isdn_NonOverlapped
992_5_B_Isdn_Overlapped
10
11
18
19
20
21
24
25
28
29
30
31
992_5_I_AllDigital_NonOverlapped
992_5_I_AllDigital_Overlapped
ANSI_T1.424
992_3_B_Isdn_NonOverlapped
992_3_B_Isdn_Overlapped
ETSI_TS_101_270
992_4_A_Pots_NonOverlapped
992_4_A_Pots_Overlapped
993_1
IEEE_8023ah
992_3_I_AllDigital_NonOverlapped
992_3_I_AllDigital_Overlapped
992_3_J_AllDigital_NonOverlapped
992_3_J_AllDigital_Overlapped
992_5_J_AllDigital_NonOverlapped
992_5_J_AllDigital_Overlapped
992_5_M_Pots_Extend_US_NonOverlapped
992_5_M_Pots_Extend_US_Overlapped
- 368 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix B Alarm Table
Table B-1
Alarm Table
Alarm ID
104
105
106
107
118
Name
alm_fan_fail
Description
System Fan Fail
alm_self_test_fail
alm_above_temper
alm_below_temper
alm_dsl_dsp
System Self Test Fail
System Above Temperature
System Below Temperature
System DSP Fail
601
602
603
610
612
613
614
615
616
619
620
622
624
alm_adsl_los
Near-end Loss of Signal
Near-end Loss of Frame
Near-end Loss of Margin
Near-end Loss Cell Delineation
Near-end No Cell Delineation
Far-end Loss of Signal
alm_adsl_lof
alm_adsl_lom
alm_adsl_lcd
alm_adsl_ncd
alm_adsl_los_fe
alm_adsl_lof_fe
alm_adsl_lom_fe
alm_adsl_lopwr_fe
alm_adsl_commf_fe
alm_adsl_nopeer_fe
alm_adsl_lcd_fe
alm_adsl_ncd_fe
Far-end Loss of Frame
Far-end Loss of Margin
Far-end Loss of Power
Far-end Communication Failure
Far-end No Peer Present
Far-end Loss Cell Delineation
Far-end No Cell Delineation
- 369 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix C Cleaning the AIR Filter
For better condition of cool system, please remember to clean the Air Filter every three
months. This section provides the procedure for how to clean the Air Filter
Procedure：
Note:
Before cleaning the Air Filter, please power-off the IDL-2402 first.
You must loosen the connection of the Air Filter Panel to the DSLAM and pull out the Air
Filter before cleaning the air filter.
1 Put on the antistatic wrist strap and connect it to a grounding point.
2 Turn the screw on the Air Filter Panel counterclockwise until it loosens the connection of
the panel to the DSLAM. Remove the Air Filter Panel.
3 Pull the air filter out of the DSLAM.
4 Wash and clean the dust that on the Air Filter.
5 Slide the cleaned Air Filter into the Air Filter slot of the DSLAM.
6 Reinstall the Air Filter Panel.
- 370 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix D Introduction for Troubleshooting
This chapter describes instructions for the IDL-2402 system problems. These procedures
may require the presence of technicians at remote IDL-2402 system sites and plus an
operator at PC to monitor system alarms by console during maintenance.
Resolving Problems Indicated Through LEDs
This section describes what to do to solve problems indicated by LEDs on the system front
panel.
Problems Indicated by LEDs
LED
Activity
Problem
Action
There is a power up
problem with the
system.
Troubleshoot the DSLAM for power
up problems; see troubleshooting
section.
SYS
Not lit even though
DSLAM is powered
up
Red
Self-test failed. There is
a functional problem
with the system.
Replace the DSLAM.
ALM
See troubleshooting section
Red
Major alarm set
Red-Flash
Major and Minor alarm See troubleshooting section.
set
Yellow
Minor alarm set
See troubleshooting section.
Resolving Problems Indicated Through Alarms
Alarms of the system are viewed through CLI and Web GUI.
If an alarm indicates a problem, please refer to troubleshooting procedures section.
Troubleshooting Procedures for the IDL-2402
When you follow a troubleshooting procedure, start from the first step of the procedure. If
the first step does not solve the problem, proceed to the next step; keep going through the
steps until the problem is solved. Use the following table to find out the appropriate
procedure for troubleshooting the listed problems.
- 371 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
List of Troubleshooting Procedures
Type of problem
Procedure Number
IDL-2402 power up problems
Procedure 1
Procedure 2
Procedure 3
Procedure 4
ADSLx service problems (POTS service is ok)
POTS service problems (ADSLx service is ok)
Subscriber service problems (no POTS and ADSLx service)
Procedure 1：Troubleshooting for Power Up Problems
Problem indication:
„
„
„
The SYS LED on the front panel is not lit even though the DSLAM is powered up
Alarm that indicates a system power up problem
Subscribers connected to the DSLAM do not have DSL service; POTS service is
ok
Procedure:
1. Check that the power cord is connected to the power socket on the front panel,
and the other end of the cord is connected to a power outlet.
2. Check that the power feeds are connected to the DSLAM, and that power is
present on the two power feeds with correct polarity.
3. Replace the IDL-2402.
4. Contact your local distributor.
- 372 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Procedure 2 Troubleshoot ADSLx Service Problems
Problem indication:
No ADSLx service to the affected subscribers (POTS service is ok).
Procedure:
1 If all subscribers connected to the DSLAM are affected, and the SYS LED on the
front panel is not lit, check the both end of power cords:
„
„
If one of the power cords is not connected, power up the DSLAM by
plugging the power cord to the power socket/power outlet.
If the power cords are both connected, follow Procedure 1 to troubleshoot
the DSLAM for power up problem
2 If all subscribers are affected, check the SYS LED on the front panel; if it is red,
replace the DSLAM.
3 If only some subscribers are affected, identify the ports that have problems.
Check that the subscribers are connected to the line interfaces properly.
4 Contact your local distributor.
Procedure 3 Troubleshoot POTS Service Problems
Problem indication:
No POTS service to the affected subscribers (ADSLx service is ok).
Procedure:
1 Check the connection of the POTS lines at the POTS connector for the DSLAM.
2 Use a bridging connector to couple the POTS and subscriber lines. If this solves
the problem, replace the DSLAM.
3 Check the condition of the POTS lines and connectors.
- 373 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Procedure 4 Subscriber Service Problems
Problem indication:
No POTS and ADSLx service to the affected subscribers.
Procedure:
1 Check the connection of the subscriber lines and POTS lines at the subscriber
line connector for DSLAM for subscribers that do not have POTS and ADSLx
service.
„
If this step results in POTS service to the affected subscribers but there is
still no ADSLx service to them, follow Procedure 2 to troubleshoot ADSLx
service problems.
„
If this step results in ADSL service to the affected subscribers but there is
still no POTS service to them, follow Procedure 3 to troubleshoot POTS
service problems.
2 Use a bridging connector to couple the POTS and subscriber lines. If this results
in POTS service to the affected subscribers, contact your distributor.
3 Check the condition of the subscriber lines and connectors.
- 374 -
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EC Declaration of Conformity
For the following equipment:
*Type of Product
*Model Number
: 24-Port IP DSLAM
: IDL-2402
* Produced by:
Manufacturer‘s Name: Planet Technology Corp.
Manufacturer‘s Address: 11F, No. 96, Min Chuan. Road, Hsin Tien
Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C.
is herewith confirmed to comply with the requirements set out in the Council Directive on the
Approximation of the Laws of the Member States relating to Electromagnetic Compatibility
(89/336/EEC, Amended by 92/31/EEC, 93/68/EEC & 98/12/EC).
For the evaluation regarding the Electromagnetic Compatibility, the following standards were
applied:
EN 300 386
EN 55022
(V1.3.3:2005)
(1998 + A1:2000 +
A2:2003,Class A)
(2000, Class A)
(1995 + A1:2001)
(1995 + A1:1998 + A2 :2001)
(1996 + A1:1998 + A2 :2001)
(2004)
EN 61000-3-2
EN 61000-3-3
EN 61000-4-2
EN 61000-4-3
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5
EN 61000-4-6
(1995 + A1:2001)
(1996 + A1:2001)
Responsible for marking this declaration if the:
⌧ Manufacturer ꢀ Authorized representative established within the EU
Authorized representative established within the EU (if applicable):
Company Name: Planet Technology Corp.
Company Address: 11F, No.96, Min Chuan Road, Hsin Tien, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C
Person responsible for making this declaration
Name, Surname
Position / Title :
Allen Huang
Product Manager
Taiwan
30th Oct., 2008
Place
Date
Legal Signature
PLANET TECHNOLOGY CORPORATION
e-mail: [email protected]
http://www.planet.com.tw
11F, No. 96, Min Chuan Road, Hsin Tien, Taipei, Taiwan, R.O.C. Tel:886-2-2219-9518 Fax:886-2-2219-9528
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|